709248

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Handleiding

579
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/604
Pagina verder
Advanced User Guide
ENGLISH
2
Introduction
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid shooting problems and accidents, rst read the “Handling
Precautions” (
=
31) and “Safety Instructions” (
=
28). Also, read this
manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come
out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store this
manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images
cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held
liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images
recorded with the camera (or music/images with music transferred to the
memory card) for purposes other than personal enjoyment. Also be aware
that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
3
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Battery Pack LP-E17
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E17E*
Strap
* Battery Charger LC-E17E comes with a power cord.
z
The camera does not come with a memory card (
=
11), interface cable,
or HDMI cable.
z
For details on the Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals, see “Instruction
Manuals” (
=
4).
z
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
z
Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
z
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (
=
4).
z
The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF les) are for lenses sold individually.
Note that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with
the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
4
Instruction Manuals
The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides
basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions.
The Advanced User Guide (this PDF le), which provides
complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon
website to a computer or other device.
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF les) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or
other device.
z
Download site
Advanced User Guide/Supplemental Information
www.canon.com/icpd
Lens Instruction Manual
www.canon.com/icpd
Software Instruction Manual
www.canon.com/icpd
z
To view the PDF les, an Adobe PDF viewing software such as Adobe
Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version recommended) is required.
z
Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
z
Double-click the downloaded PDF le to open it.
z
To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section
or the like.
5
Instruction Manuals
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
Using QR Code
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF les) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet using the QR code.
www.canon.com/icpd
z
A software app is required to read the QR code.
z
Select your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced User
Guide/Instruction Manuals.
z
Select [
5
: Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera screen.
6
Quick Start Guide
1
Insert the battery (
=
42).
z
Upon purchase, charge the battery
to start using (
=
40).
2
Insert the card (
=
42).
z
Insert the card with the label facing
the front of the camera.
3
Attach the lens (
=
49).
z
Align the white mount index on the
lens with the white mount index on
the camera to attach the lens.
z
Remove the lens cap.
4
(
1
)
(
2
)
Prepare to shoot.
z
Press (1) as you turn (2) slightly,
and then release (1).
z
Turn (2) a little more until it clicks.
7
Quick Start Guide
5
Set the power switch to <
1
>
(
=
47).
6
Set the focus mode switch to
<AF>.
z
<AF> stands for autofocus.
z
<MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
7
Set the Mode dial to <
A
>
(
=
70).
z
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
8
Focus on the subject (
=
58).
z
[
p
] (an AF point) appears over any
face detected.
z
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
8
Quick Start Guide
9
Take the picture (
=
58).
z
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
10
Review the picture.
z
The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
z
To display the image again, press
the <
x
> button (
=
304).
z
To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (
=
304).
z
To delete images, see “Erase Images” (
=
327).
9
About This Manual
Icons in this Manual
<
6
>
: Indicates the Main dial.
<
5
>
: Indicates the Quick control dial.
<
W
> <
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> : Indicates the corresponding direction on the <
V
>
cross keys.
<
5
>
: Indicates the control dial.
<
Q
> <
0
>
: Indicates the Quick Control/Setting button.
*
: Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the
operation for the button you pressed, as timed after
you release the button.
y
In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons and
displayed on the screen are also used in this manual when discussing relevant
operations and functionality.
M
(in page titles)
: Functions only available in Creative Zone modes
(<
t
>, <
d
>, <
s
>, <
f
>, or <
a
> mode) or for
movies recorded with manual exposure.
=
***
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
10
About This Manual
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions,
Sample Photos
z
Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to
<
1
> (
=
47).
z
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to
their defaults.
z
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF-M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM lens as an example.
z
The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual are
for instructional purposes only.
z
In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount
adapter is used.
11
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity.
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera (
=
490).
z
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
UHS-II and UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with ample performance
(fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording size.
For details, see
=
579.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
12
Chapters
Introduction 2
Preparation and Basic Operations 39
Basic Zone 69
Creative Zone 103
Shooting 115
Flash Photography 283
Playback 301
Wireless Features 375
Set-up 481
Custom Functions / My Menu 525
Reference 549
13
Introduction 2
Item Check List ......................................................................................3
Instruction Manuals ................................................................................4
Quick Start Guide ...................................................................................6
About This Manual .................................................................................9
Compatible Cards ................................................................................11
Chapters...............................................................................................12
Contents ...............................................................................................13
Index to Features .................................................................................23
Safety Instructions ...............................................................................28
Handling Precautions ...........................................................................31
Part Names ..........................................................................................34
Preparation and Basic Operations 39
Charging the Battery ............................................................................40
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card ............................................42
Using the Screen .................................................................................46
Turning on the Power ...........................................................................47
Attaching and Detaching a Lens ..........................................................49
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses ..........................................51
Using an Electronic Viewnder (Sold Separately) ................................54
Basic Operations ..................................................................................57
Menu Operations and Settings ............................................................62
Touch-Screen Operation ......................................................................66
Quick Control .......................................................................................67
Contents
14
Contents
Basic Zone 69
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic) ...........................70
Special Scene Mode (SCN) .................................................................78
Self Portrait Mode ................................................................................80
Portrait Mode........................................................................................81
Smooth Skin Mode ...............................................................................82
Landscape Mode .................................................................................83
Sports Mode .........................................................................................84
Panning Mode ......................................................................................85
Close-up Mode .....................................................................................87
Food Mode ...........................................................................................88
Night Portrait Mode ..............................................................................89
Handheld Night Scene Mode ...............................................................90
HDR Backlight Control Mode ...............................................................91
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes ...........................................................92
Creative Filters Mode ...........................................................................96
Creative Zone 103
Program AE Mode (P) ........................................................................104
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv).............................................................106
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av) ..........................................................108
Manual Exposure Mode (M) ............................................................... 110
Flexible-priority AE (Fv) ...................................................................... 112
15
Contents
Shooting 115
Still Photo Shooting 116
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting ........................................................117
Image Quality .....................................................................................122
Still Image Aspect Ratio .....................................................................125
Image Review Time............................................................................127
Lens Aberration Correction ................................................................128
Drive Mode .........................................................................................133
Self-Timer ...........................................................................................135
RAW Burst Mode ...............................................................................137
Exposure Compensation ....................................................................140
Auto Exposure Bracketing .................................................................141
ISO Speed Settings ...........................................................................143
Auto Lighting Optimizer ......................................................................149
Highlight Tone Priority ........................................................................150
Metering Mode ...................................................................................151
Metering Timer ...................................................................................153
Exposure Simulation ..........................................................................154
White Balance ....................................................................................155
White Balance Correction/Bracketing ................................................160
Color Space .......................................................................................162
Picture Style Selection .......................................................................163
Picture Style Customization ...............................................................166
Picture Style Registration ...................................................................169
Long Exposure Noise Reduction .......................................................171
16
Contents
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction ......................................................172
Dust Delete Data Acquisition .............................................................174
HDR Mode .........................................................................................176
Focus Bracketing ...............................................................................180
Touch Shutter .....................................................................................184
Shutter Release Method ....................................................................186
Interval Timer .....................................................................................187
Long (Bulb) Exposures ......................................................................190
Anti-icker Shooting ...........................................................................193
AF Operation ......................................................................................195
AF Method..........................................................................................198
Eye Detection AF ...............................................................................209
Continuous AF ...................................................................................211
Touch & Drag AF ................................................................................212
Manually Focusing with a Lens after AF ............................................214
AF-Assist Beam Firing .......................................................................215
Image Stabilization .............................................................................216
Exposure Lock (AE Lock) ..................................................................217
Manual Focus.....................................................................................218
MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis) ........................................................220
Focus Mode Switching .......................................................................221
Type of Digest Movie .........................................................................222
Remote Control Shooting ...................................................................223
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions ...............................................224
17
Contents
Movie Recording 227
Tab Menus: Movie Recording ............................................................228
Movie Mode........................................................................................232
HDR Movie Mode ...............................................................................239
Movie Recording Quality ....................................................................241
Sound Recording ...............................................................................248
Time-lapse Movies .............................................................................250
Video Snapshots ................................................................................261
Miniature Eect Movie .......................................................................266
Movie Digital IS ..................................................................................268
Auto Level for Movies ........................................................................270
Movie Servo AF ..................................................................................271
Other Menu Functions .......................................................................276
General Movie Recording Cautions ...................................................280
Flash Photography 283
Shooting With the Built-in Flash .........................................................284
Flash Function Settings .....................................................................289
Shooting With External Speedlites .....................................................300
Playback 301
Tab Menus: Playback .........................................................................302
Image Playback .................................................................................304
Magnied Image Display ....................................................................307
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) ..............................................308
18
Contents
Movie Playback ..................................................................................309
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ............................................313
Frame Extraction ................................................................................315
Digest Movie Editing ..........................................................................317
Still Photo Extraction from RAW Burst Images ..................................319
Playback on a TV Set .........................................................................321
Protect Images ...................................................................................323
Rotate Images ....................................................................................326
Erase Images .....................................................................................327
Print Ordering .....................................................................................331
Photobook Set-up ..............................................................................335
Creative Filters ...................................................................................338
RAW Image Processing .....................................................................341
Creative Assist ...................................................................................347
Quick Control RAW Processing .........................................................349
Red-Eye Correction............................................................................350
Create Album .....................................................................................351
Cropping.............................................................................................354
Resizing .............................................................................................356
Rating .................................................................................................358
Slideshows .........................................................................................361
Set Image Search Conditions ............................................................363
Main Dial Browsing ............................................................................365
Playback Information Display .............................................................367
Highlight Alert .....................................................................................369
AF Point Display.................................................................................370
19
Contents
Playback Grid .....................................................................................371
View from Last Seen ..........................................................................372
Magnication (Approx.) ......................................................................373
Wireless Features 375
Tab Menus: Wireless Tab ...................................................................376
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection ...........................................377
Connecting to a Smartphone .............................................................379
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi ..................................................408
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi .......................................................416
Sending Images to a Web Service .....................................................426
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points ..................................................441
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control .........................................446
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi ......................................................................449
Registering Multiple Connection Settings ..........................................451
Wi-Fi Settings .....................................................................................452
Bluetooth Settings ..............................................................................453
Changing the Nickname .....................................................................454
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices .........455
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings ........................................458
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default ......................460
View Info Screen ................................................................................461
Virtual Keyboard Operations ..............................................................462
Responding to Error Messages .........................................................463
Wireless Communication Function Notes ..........................................474
20
Contents
Security ..............................................................................................476
Checking Network Settings ................................................................477
Wireless Communication Status ........................................................478
Set-up 481
Tab Menus: Set-up .............................................................................482
Select Folder ......................................................................................484
File Numbering ...................................................................................486
Auto Rotate ........................................................................................489
Format Card .......................................................................................490
Mode Guide .......................................................................................492
Feature Guide ....................................................................................493
Eco Mode ...........................................................................................494
Power Saving .....................................................................................495
Display Brightness .............................................................................496
Date/Time/Zone .................................................................................497
Language ...........................................................................................500
Focus Mode Switch (AF/MF)..............................................................501
Video System .....................................................................................502
Sensor Cleaning ................................................................................503
Touch Control .....................................................................................507
Beeping ..............................................................................................508
HDMI Resolution ................................................................................509
HDMI HDR Output .............................................................................510
Shutter Button Function for Movies .................................................... 511
Shooting Information Display .............................................................512
21
Contents
Display Performance ..........................................................................515
Viewnder Display Format .................................................................515
Display Settings .................................................................................516
Reverse Display .................................................................................517
Help Features.....................................................................................518
Custom Shooting Modes (C1/C2) ......................................................519
Reset Camera ....................................................................................520
Copyright Information .........................................................................521
Other Information ...............................................................................523
Custom Functions / My Menu 525
Tab Menus: Customization .................................................................526
Setting Custom Functions ..................................................................527
Custom Function Setting Items ..........................................................528
Clearing Custom Function Settings ...................................................542
Tab Menus: My Menu .........................................................................543
Registering My Menu .........................................................................544
Reference 549
Software .............................................................................................550
Importing Images to a Computer .......................................................552
In-Camera Charging ..........................................................................554
Household Power Outlet Accessory ...................................................555
Troubleshooting Guide .......................................................................556
22
Contents
Error Codes ........................................................................................575
Performance Data ..............................................................................576
Information Display ............................................................................583
Index ..................................................................................................596
23
Index to Features
Power
z
Charging the battery (
=
40)
z
Battery level (
=
48)
z
Eco mode (
=
494)
z
Power saving (
=
495)
Cards
z
Formatting (
=
490)
z
Cards compatible with movie
recording (
=
579)
Lens
z
Attaching (
=
49,
=
51)
z
Detaching (
=
50,
=
53)
z
Releasing shutter without lens
(
=
541)
Basic Settings
z
Date/Time/Zone (
=
497)
z
Language (
=
500)
z
Beeper (
=
508)
z
Clear all camera settings (
=
520)
z
Copyright information (
=
521)
Screen
z
Tilting (
=
46)
z
Touch control (
=
66)
z
Feature guide (
=
493)
z
Brightness (
=
496)
z
Electronic level (
=
512)
z
Help (
=
518)
AF
z
AF operation (
=
195)
z
AF method (
=
198)
z
AF point selection (
=
203)
z
Eye Detection AF (
=
209)
z
Continuous AF (
=
211)
z
Touch & drag AF (
=
212)
z
Electronic manual focus (
=
214)
z
AF-assist beam (
=
215)
z
Manual focusing (
=
218)
z
MF peaking settings (
=
220)
Metering
z
Metering mode (
=
151)
Drive
z
Maximum burst (
=
124)
z
Drive mode (
=
133)
z
Self-timer (
=
135)
24
Index to Features
Image Recording Settings
z
Creating/Selecting a folder
(
=
484)
z
File numbering (
=
486)
Image Quality
z
Image quality (
=
122)
z
Still image aspect ratio (
=
125)
z
Lens aberration correction
(
=
128)
z
ISO speed (still photos) (
=
143)
z
Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
149)
z
Highlight tone priority (
=
150)
z
White balance (
=
155)
z
Color space (
=
162)
z
Picture Style (
=
163)
z
Noise reduction for long exposures
(
=
171)
z
Noise reduction for high ISO
speeds (
=
172)
z
Anti-icker shooting (
=
193)
Shooting
z
Shooting mode (
=
36)
z
Quick Control (
=
67)
z
Creative Assist (
=
76)
z
Creative lters (
=
96)
z
Depth-of-eld preview (
=
109)
z
RAW burst mode (
=
137)
z
HDR mode (
=
176)
z
Focus bracketing (
=
180)
z
Touch shutter (
=
184)
z
Interval timer (
=
187)
z
Bulb timer (
=
191)
z
Magnied view (
=
205)
z
Remote control (
=
223)
z
Remote switch (
=
223)
z
Shooting information display
(
=
512)
z
Grid display (
=
513)
z
Error codes (
=
575)
25
Index to Features
Exposure
z
Exposure compensation with
M+ISO Auto (
=
111)
z
Exposure compensation (
=
140)
z
AEB (
=
141)
z
Exposure simulation (
=
154)
z
AE lock (
=
217)
z
Safety shift (
=
531)
Flash
z
Built-in ash (
=
284)
z
Flash exposure compensation
(
=
286)
z
FE lock (
=
287)
z
Built-in ash function settings
(
=
292)
z
External ash function settings
(
=
294)
z
External ash custom function
(
=
298)
z
External ash (
=
300)
Movie Recording
z
Autoexposure recording (
=
232)
z
Manual exposure recording
(
=
234)
z
HDR movie (
=
239)
z
Movie recording size (
=
241)
z
Sound recording (
=
248)
z
Wind lter (
=
248)
z
Attenuator (
=
249)
z
Microphone (
=
249)
z
Time-lapse movie (
=
250)
z
Video snapshot (
=
261)
z
Movie Servo AF (
=
271)
z
Movie Servo AF track sensitivity
(
=
273)
z
Movie Servo AF speed (
=
274)
z
Remote control shooting (
=
276)
z
ISO speed (movie) (
=
277)
z
HDMI output (
=
278)
z
Auto slow shutter (
=
279)
26
Index to Features
Playback
z
Image review time (
=
127)
z
Single-image display (
=
304)
z
Touch playback (
=
306)
z
Magnied view (
=
307)
z
Index display (
=
308)
z
Movie playback (
=
309)
z
Editing a movie’s rst and last
scenes (
=
313)
z
Frame Grab (4K) (
=
315)
z
Still photo extraction (RAW burst
images) (
=
319)
z
Viewing images on a television
(
=
321)
z
Protect (
=
323)
z
Image rotation (
=
326)
z
Erasing (
=
327)
z
Rating (
=
358)
z
Slide show (
=
361)
z
Setting image search conditions
(
=
363)
z
Image browsing (Jump display)
(
=
365)
z
Playback information display
(
=
367)
z
Highlight alert (
=
369)
z
AF point display (
=
370)
z
Grid display (
=
371)
z
HDMI resolution (
=
509)
z
HDR output (
=
510)
z
Shooting information display
(
=
588)
Image Editing
z
Creative lters (
=
338)
z
RAW image processing (
=
341)
z
Red-eye correction (
=
350)
z
Video snapshot album (
=
351)
z
Cropping JPEGs (
=
354)
z
Resizing JPEGs (
=
356)
Print Ordering
z
Print order (DPOF) (
=
331)
z
Photobook Set-up (
=
335)
Customization
z
Custom shooting mode (
=
519)
z
Custom Functions (C.Fn) (
=
526)
z
Custom button operations
(
=
535)
z
Custom dial operations (
=
540)
z
My Menu (
=
544)
27
Index to Features
Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction
z
Dust Delete Data Acquisition
(
=
174)
z
Sensor cleaning (
=
503)
z
Manual sensor cleaning (
=
505)
Software
z
Downloading and Installing
(
=
550)
z
Software Instruction Manuals
(
=
551)
Wireless Features
z
Connect to smartphones (
=
379)
z
Auto send images to smartphones
(
=
394)
z
Remote control (EOS Utility)
(
=
408)
z
Auto send images to computers
(
=
413)
z
Print from Wi-Fi printers (
=
416)
z
Upload to Web service (
=
426)
z
Connect to Wireless Remote
(
=
446)
z
Geotagging Images (
=
455)
z
Clear wireless settings (
=
460)
28
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the
product or others.
WARNING
:
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
z
Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if
swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical
assistance.
z
Use only power sources specied in this instruction manual for use with the product.
z
Do not disassemble or modify the product.
z
Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
z
Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
z
Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence
of smoke or a strange smell.
z
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
z
Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
z
Do not use the product where ammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
z
Do not leave a lens or a camera with a lens attached, exposed without the lens cap
attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause re.
z
Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
z
Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specied product.
• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to re.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing,
ush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact,
ush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water and seek
immediate medical assistance.
29
Safety Instructions
z
Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.
• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a
dry cloth.
• Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
• Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
z
Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during
lightning storms.
z
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the
power cord.
z
Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use
when the product is still warm in temperature.
z
Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
z
Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
z
Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5–40 °C
(41–104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
z
Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and
blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar
equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places and for people
with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
z
Follow any indications to turn o the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the eect of
electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
30
Safety Instructions
CAUTION:
Denotes the risk of injury.
z
Do not re the ash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
z
Do not look at the screen or through the viewnder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using
the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
z
Flash emits high temperatures when red. Keep ngers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the ash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the ash.
z
Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when
touched.
z
Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product
attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the
product or expose the product to strong impacts.
z
Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
z
Only mount the product on a tripod that is suciently sturdy.
z
Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
z
Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
z
If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this
product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.
31
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
z
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to
physical shock.
z
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If the
camera gets wet, contact a Canon Service Center immediately. Wipe o
any water droplets with a clean, dry cloth, and if the camera is exposed
to salty air, wipe it o with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
z
Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
z
Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust,
water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
z
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic eld
such as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the
camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large
antenna. Strong magnetic elds can cause camera malfunction or
destroy image data.
z
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
z
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
z
Do not block the built-in ash or shutter curtain operations with your
nger or other objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
z
Use a commercially available blower brush to remove dust from the
lens or other parts. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to
clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the
nearest Canon Service Center.
z
Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your ngers. This is
to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause
camera malfunction.
z
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, rst put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust
to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
32
Handling Precautions
z
If condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the
camera or remove the lens, card, or battery. Turn the camera o and wait
until the moisture has fully evaporated before resuming use.
Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still internally cold, do not
remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to the
ambient temperature.
z
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while
the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a
while to check that the camera is still working.
z
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust
and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
z
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its
functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time
or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have
the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the
camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
z
The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still
photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
z
If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
Screen
z
Although the screen is manufactured with very high precision technology
with over 99.99% eective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be
dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is
not a malfunction. They do not aect the images recorded.
z
If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few
days.
z
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
33
Handling Precautions
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
z
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
z
Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your ngers or anything
metallic.
z
Do not ax any stickers, etc. on the card.
z
Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic
eld, such as a television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone
to having static electricity.
z
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
z
Store the card in a case.
z
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Smudges on the Image Sensor
z
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.
If smudges are visible on images, have the sensor cleaned by a Canon
Service Center.
Lens
z
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down
the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens
cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical
contacts (1).
(1)
34
Part Names
(
9
)
(
10
)(
8
)
(
20
)
(
19
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
24
)
(
15
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
21
) (
22
)(
23
)
(
11
)
(
18
)
(
17
)
(
16
)
(
14
)
(1) <
5
> Quick control dial
(2) <
B
> Multi-function button
(3) Shutter button
(4) <
6
> Main dial
(5) EF-M lens mount index
(6) Grip
(7) Contacts
(8) <
> Dial function button
(9) Mode dial
(10) Image sensor
(11) Built-in ash
(12) Strap mount
(13) <
I
> Flash up lever
(14) AF-assist beam/Red-eye
reduction/Self-timer/Remote
control lamp
(15) Terminal cover
(16) Lens release button
(17) Lens lock pin
(18) Lens mount
(19) <
Y
> External microphone IN
terminal
(20) <
F
> Remote control terminal
(21) Tripod socket
(22) DC coupler cord hole
(23) Card slot/Battery compartment
cover
(24) Body cap
35
Part Names
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
16
)
(
15
)
(
17
)
(
14
)
(
13
)
(
24
)
(
22
)
(
21
)
(
25
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
20
)
(
6
)
(
23
)
(
8
)
(
9
)
(
7
)
(
10
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
3
)(
3
)
(1) <
V
> Focal plane mark
(2) Hot shoe
(3) Microphone
(4) Flash sync contacts
(5) Power switch
(6) Speaker
(7) <
S
> AF point button
(8) <
A
> AE lock/FE lock button
(9) Serial number (body number)
(10) Screen
(11) <
g
> Digital terminal
(12) <
D
> HDMI OUT
terminal
(13) <
B
> Info button
(14) <
W
/
O
> Up/Exposure
compensation button
(15) <
Y
/
j
> Left/Drive mode button
(16) <
X
/
L
> Down/Erase button
(17) <
x
> Playback button
(18) AF start button
(19) Focus mode switch
(20) Movie shooting button
(21) Access lamp
(22) <
Z
/
I
> Right/Flash button
(23) <
Q
/
0
> Quick Control/Setting
button
(24) <
V
/
5
> Cross keys/Control dial
(25) <
M
> Menu button
36
Part Names
Mode Dial
The Mode dial includes Basic Zone modes, Creative Zone modes, and
movie recording mode.
(
1
)
(1) Basic Zone
All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the
subject or scene for shooting.
A
/
D
: Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (
=
70)
8
: Special scene (
=
78)
J
Self Portrait (
=
80)
4
Close-up (
=
87)
2
Portrait (
=
81)
P
Food (
=
88)
K
Smooth skin (
=
82)
6
Night Portrait (
=
89)
3
Landscape (
=
83)
F
Handheld Night Scene
(
=
90)
5
Sports (
=
84)
G
HDR Backlight Control
(
=
91)
r
Panning (
=
85)
U
: Creative lters (
=
96)
I
Grainy B/W (
=
98)
c
Miniature eect (
=
99)
G
Soft focus (
=
98)
A
HDR art standard (
=
99)
X
Fish-eye eect (
=
98)
B
HDR art vivid (
=
99)
K
Water painting eect
(
=
98)
C
HDR art bold (
=
99)
H
Toy camera eect (
=
98)
D
HDR art embossed (
=
99)
37
Part Names
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(2) Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects as
desired.
t
Flexible-priority AE (
=
112)
d
Program AE (
=
104)
s
Shutter-priority AE (
=
106)
f
Aperture-priority AE (
=
108)
a
Manual exposure (
=
110)
(3) Custom shooting modes
You can assign <
t
>, <
d
>, <
s
>, <
f
>, <
a
>, AF operation, menu
functions, and more to <
w
> or <
x
> (
=
519).
(4)
k
: Movie recording (
=
232)
38
Part Names
Battery Charger LC-E17E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (
=
40).
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Battery pack slot
(2) Full-charge lamp
(3) Charge lamp
(4) Power cord
(5) Power cord socket
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
3939
Preparation and Basic
Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting
and the basic camera operations.
40
Charging the Battery
1
Detach the protective cover
provided with the battery.
2
Fully insert the battery in the
charger.
z
Do the opposite to remove the battery.
(2)
(1)
3
Recharge the battery.
z
Connect the power cord to the charger
and insert the plug into a power outlet.
z
Recharging starts automatically and the
charge lamp (1) lights up in orange.
z
When the battery is fully recharged, the
full-charge lamp (2) will light up in green.
z
It takes approx. 2 hr. to fully charge a
completely exhausted battery at room
temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to charge the battery will vary
greatly depending on the ambient
temperature and the battery’s remaining
capacity.
z
For safety reasons, charging in low
temperatures (5–10°C / 41–50°F) will
take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
41
Charging the Battery
z
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
z
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to
be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its
capacity.
z
After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
z
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the
battery performance.
z
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter
for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery
charger.
z
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having
been fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its
service life.
Purchase a new battery.
z
After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 5 sec.
z
The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack
LP-E17.
42
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card
Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17 into the camera.
z
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Insertion
1
Slide the card slot/battery
compartment cover and open the
cover.
2
Insert the battery.
z
Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
z
Insert the battery until it locks in place.
(
1
)
3
Insert the card.
z
Insert the card with the label facing the
front of the camera as shown until it
clicks in place.
43
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card
4
Close the cover.
z
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
z
You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E17.
z
After opening the card slot/battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it
back any further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.
Removal
(
1
)
1
Open the card slot/battery
compartment cover.
z
Set the power switch to <
2
>.
z
Check that the access lamp (1) is o,
then open the cover.
z
If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen,
close the cover.
2
Remove the battery.
z
Press the battery lock lever as shown by
the arrow and remove the battery.
z
To prevent short-circuits, always attach
the included protective cover (
=
40)
to the battery.
44
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card
3
Remove the card.
z
Gently push in the card, then let it go to
eject.
z
Pull the card straight out.
4
Close the cover.
z
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
45
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card
Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera (
=
490).
z
The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining capacity of
the card, the settings of image quality, ISO speed, etc.
z
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being
written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred.
Do not open the card slot/battery compartment cover. Also, never do any
of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. Otherwise, it can
damage the image data, card, or camera.
y
Removing the card.
y
Removing the battery.
y
Shaking or striking the camera.
y
Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power outlet
accessories (sold separately) are used).
z
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start
from 0001 (
=
486).
z
If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and reinsert
the card. If the error persists, use a dierent card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images
and then format the card with the camera (
=
490). The card may then return
to normal.
z
Do not touch the card’s contacts with your ngers or metal objects. Do not
expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts,
contact failure may result.
z
Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
z
Use of UHS-II microSDHC/SDXC cards with a microSD to SD adapter is not
recommended. When using UHS-II cards, use SDHC/SDXC cards.
46
Using the Screen
You can change the direction and angle of the screen.
Tilting the Screen Downward
z
Pull the top of the screen downward
toward you.
z
The screen opens to about 45°.
Tilting the Screen Upward
z
The screen lifts upward and opens to
about 180°.
z
When including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
z
When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
z
Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the camera.
47
Turning on the Power
z
<
1
>
The camera turns on.
z
<
2
>
The camera is turned o and does not
function. Set the power switch to this
position when not using the camera.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen
appears, see
=
497 to set the date/time/zone.
Changing the Interface Language
To change the interface language, see
=
500.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
z
Whenever you set the power switch to <
1
> or <
2
>, sensor cleaning
will be performed automatically. (A small sound may be audible.) During
the sensor cleaning, the screen will display [
f
].
z
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <
1
>/<
2
> at a short
interval, the [
f
] icon may not be displayed. This is normal and not a
malfunction.
z
If you set the power switch to <
2
> while an image is being recorded to the
card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn o after the recording
nishes.
48
Turning on the Power
Battery Level Indicator
: Battery level is sucient.
: Battery level is low, but the camera
can still be used.
: Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
: Charge the battery.
z
Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
y
Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
y
Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
y
Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
y
Using the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function.
z
The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting
conditions.
z
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses may
exhaust the battery faster than others.
z
In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a
sucient battery level.
49
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with EF-M lenses. By attaching an optional Mount
Adapter EF-EOS M, you can also use EF and EF-S lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
z
Remove the rear lens cap and the body
cap by turning them as shown by the
arrows.
2
Attach the lens.
z
Align the white mount index on the
lens with the white mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
3
Remove the front lens cap.
(
1
)
(
2
)
4
Prepare to shoot.
z
Press (1) as you turn (2) slightly, and
then release (1).
z
Turn (2) a little more until it clicks.
50
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
z
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
z
Attach the rear lens cap to the detached
lens.
z
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of
vision.
z
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to <
2
>.
z
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not
touch the rotating part.
z
Shooting angle of view
- Because the image area is smaller than 35mm lm format, the eective angle
of view corresponds to approx. 1.6 times the lens’s indicated focal length.
Image area (approx.) (22.3×14.8 mm / 0.88×0.58 in.)
35mm lm format (36×24 mm / 1.42×0.94 in.)
z
For instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual
(
=
4).
Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body
cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
51
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount Adapter
EF-EOS M.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
z
Remove the caps on the lens, adapter,
and body.
(
1
)
(
2
)
2
Attach the lens to the adapter.
z
Align the red or white mount index on
the lens with the corresponding mount
index on the adapter and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
(1) Red index
(2) White index
(
3
)
3
Attach the adapter to the camera.
z
Align the white mount indexes (3) on the
adapter and camera and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
52
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
4
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
z
<AF> stands for autofocus.
z
<MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
5
Remove the front lens cap.
53
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
Detaching the Lens
1
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the adapter as shown
by the arrow.
z
Turn the adapter until it stops, then
detach it.
2
Detach the lens from the adapter.
z
Hold down the lens release lever
on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
z
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach
it.
z
Attach the lens cap to the lens after
removal.
z
For lens precautions, see
=
50.
z
With EF and EF-S lenses, the camera’s focus mode switch has no eect.
z
When using a lens that is heavier than the camera, hold the camera by the lens
when you shoot or carry it.
z
With EF lenses that incorporate a tripod mount (such as super telephoto
lenses), attach the tripod to the tripod mount on the lens. When using lenses
without a tripod mount, attach the tripod to the tripod mount on the mount
adapter.
54
Using an Electronic Viewfinder
(Sold Separately)
Shooting is easier with an optional electronic viewnder, which helps you
concentrate on keeping subjects in focus.
Note that fewer shots and less recording time are available than when using
the screen (LCD monitor) on the back of the camera.
1
Make sure the camera is o.
2
Attach the electronic viewnder to
the hot shoe.
Remove the hot shoe cap.
Remove the viewnder cover.
Insert the viewnder’s connection
component into the hot shoe (
=
35)
as shown until it clicks into place.
3
Adjust the electronic viewnder to
the desired angle.
You can adjust the angle of the
viewnder up to about 90° to suit the
scene or how you are shooting.
55
Using an Electronic Viewnder (Sold Separately)
4
Turn the camera on and switch
between using the screen and
viewnder as needed.
Moving the viewnder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
Moving the viewnder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and
activate the camera screen.
EVF-DC1
EVF-DC2
5
Adjust the diopter.
Turn the dial to bring viewnder images
into sharp focus.
6
When nished, remove the
electronic viewnder.
To remove the viewnder from the
camera, turn the camera o and hold
down the viewnder’s <UNLOCK>
button as you remove it.
Remove and store the viewnder when
you are not using it.
56
Using an Electronic Viewnder (Sold Separately)
z
The viewnder display and camera screen cannot be activated at the same
time.
z
Touch operations on the camera screen are not possible while the viewnder
display is in use.
z
Although the viewnder is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design
specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as
red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or aect recorded
images.
z
Some aspect ratio settings (
=
125) will cause black bars to be displayed on
the top and bottom or left and right edges of the screen. These areas will not
be recorded.
z
You can switch between viewnder and screen display by pressing the
viewnder’s <
> button.
z
The screen is not activated when you move your eye away from the viewnder
with [Manual display] set to [Viewnder] after you have selected [
5
: Display
settings] and set [Display control] to [Manual], so press the viewnder’s
<
> button to activate the screen.
z
Display of shooting information is not adjusted when you hold the camera
vertically with [VF vertical display] set to [O] after you have selected
[
5
: Shooting info. disp.].
z
You can congure display brightness (
=
496) for the viewnder and camera
screen separately.
z
To reduce the shooting screen, set [
5
: VF display format] to [Display 2].
z
Angular adjustment is not possible with EVF-DC2.
57
Basic Operations
Holding the Camera
As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see
=
46.
High angleNormal angle Low angle
58
Basic Operations
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway.
Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture value) is displayed for approx.
8 sec. or as set for the metering timer.*
* By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.
Pressing Completely
This action shoots.
z
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
z
Hold the camera steady.
z
Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
59
Basic Operations
z
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway rst, or if
you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately,
the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
z
Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to shooting-
ready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.
<
6
> Main Dial
While looking at the screen, turn the <
6
>
dial.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture value, etc.
<
5
> Quick Control Dial
While looking at the screen, turn the <
5
>
dial.
During playback, you can magnify images
or switch to index display.
AF Start Button
In Creative Zone modes, has the same
eect as pressing the shutter button
halfway.
60
Basic Operations
<
B
> Multi-Function Button
By pressing the <
B
> button and turning
the <
5
> dial, you can set the ISO speed.
<
5
> Control Dial
Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Additionally, you
can perform most of the operations that
are possible with the <
W
> <
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
Frequently used functions can also be
assigned (
=
540).
61
Basic Operations
INFO Button
Each press of the <
B
> button changes
the information shown.
The following sample screens are for still
photos.
62
Menu Operations and Settings
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
7
)
(
6
)
(
1
)
(1) <
B
> button
(2) Screen
(3) <
V
> Cross keys/Control dial
(4) <
M
> button
(5) <
0
> button
(6) Main dial
(7) Quick control dial
Basic Zone Modes Menu Screen
* In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and menu items do not appear.
63
Menu Operations and Settings
Creative Zone Modes Menu Screen
(8)(7)(6)(5)(4)
(1)
(10)
(2)
(9)
(3)
(1) Main tabs
(2) Secondary tabs
(3) Menu items
(4)
z
: Shooting
(5)
3
: Playback
(6)
k
: Wireless features
(7)
5
: Set-up
(8)
8
: Custom Functions
(9)
9
: My Menu
(10) Menu settings
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
2
Select a tab.
z
Press the <
B
> button to switch
between main tabs.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to select a
secondary tab.
64
Menu Operations and Settings
3
Select an item.
z
Turn the <
5
> dial to select an item,
then press <
0
>.
4
Select an option.
z
Turn the <
5
> dial to select an option.
z
The current setting is indicated in blue.
5
Set an option.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
6
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button to nish and
prepare for shooting.
z
The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed
the <
M
> button to display the menu screen.
z
Menu operations are also possible by tapping the menu screen, pressing the
<
V
> cross keys, or turning the control dial.
z
To cancel the operation, press the <
M
> button.
65
Menu Operations and Settings
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: Highlight tone priority
Dimmed menu items cannot be set.
The menu item is dimmed if another
function setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <
0
>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will become
settable.
z
You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu
items.
z
[Basic settings] in [
5
: Reset camera] enables you to restore menu functions
to default settings (
=
520).
66
Touch-Screen Operation
You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen
(touch-screen panel) with your nger.
Tap
Sample screen (Quick Control)
z
Use your nger to tap on (touch briey
and then remove your nger from) the
screen.
z
For example, when you tap on [
Q
],
the Quick Control screen appears.
By tapping on [
2
], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Drag
Sample screen (Menu screen)
z
Slide your nger while touching the
screen.
z
If [
5
: Beep] is set to [Touch
], the beep will not sound for touch operations
(
=
508).
z
Touch control responsiveness can be adjusted (
=
507).
67
Quick Control
You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. This is
called Quick Control (except in <
A
> mode).
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
2
Select a setting item.
z
Press the <
W
> <
X
> keys for selection.
z
When the screen at left is displayed,
press the <
W
> <
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> keys for
selection.
3
Select an option.
z
Turn the <
6
> or <
5
> dial, or press
the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to change the
setting. Some items are set by pressing
a button after this.
z
Press <
0
> to nalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
z
You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (
=
66).
68
6969
Basic Zone
This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone modes on the
Mode dial for best results.
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the
camera sets everything automatically.
70
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto
(Fully Automatic)
<
A
> <
D
> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the
scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can adjust focus
automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of
the subject.
With <
D
>, you can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still
photos. The camera records 2–4-second clips of scenes before each shot,
which are later combined in a digest movie (
=
222,
=
317).
1
Set the Mode dial to <A> or <D>.
2
Press <0>.
z
Read the message and select [OK].
3
Aim the camera at what you will
shoot (the subject).
z
A frame may be displayed around the
subject, under some shooting conditions.
z
AF points are displayed over any faces
detected.
71
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
4
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
z
If [
D
] blinks, use the <
D
> lever to raise
the built-in ash.
z
You can also focus by tapping a person’s
face or another subject on the screen
(Touch AF) when [
z
: Continuous AF]
is set to [Disable].
z
Under low light, the AF-assist beam
(
=
215) is automatically activated if
needed.
z
For stationary subjects, the AF point is
displayed in green when the subject is in
focus, and the camera beeps. (One-Shot
AF/<
A
> only)
z
For moving subjects, the AF point is
displayed in blue (<
A
> only) and
tracks subject movement. The camera
does not beep. (Servo AF)
5
Take the picture.
z
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
z
The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
z
To retract the built-in ash, push it down
with your ngers.
z
Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected
correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
72
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
z
AF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press
the shutter button halfway. Even when automatically set to One-Shot AF, the
camera will switch to Servo AF if subject motion is detected while you are
pressing the shutter button halfway (<
A
> only).
z
The <
A
> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to a Creative Zone mode (
=
37) and select a Picture Style other than
[
D
], then shoot again (
=
163).
D
: Hybrid Auto
z
For more impressive digest movies, aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
z
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in
A
mode, because digest movies are
recorded for each shot.
z
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image immediately after
turning the camera on, choosing <
D
> mode, or operating the camera in other
ways.
z
Any sounds and vibrations from your camera or lens operations will be
recorded in digest movies.
z
Digest movie image quality is [
L6
] for NTSC or [
L5
] for PAL.
This varies depending on the video system setting.
z
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the
self-timer.
z
Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following cases even if
they were recorded on the same day in <
D
> mode.
y
The digest movie recording time reaches approx. 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
(May also be saved as separate les if the size exceeds approx. 4 GB.)
y
The digest movie is protected.
y
Daylight saving time, video system, or time zone settings are changed.
z
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
73
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Minimizing Blurred Photos
z
Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment.
Mount the camera securely on the tripod.
z
Using a remote switch (sold separately,
=
223) or a wireless remote
control (sold separately,
=
223) is recommended.
FAQ
z
Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).
Aim the camera at an area with good contrast, then press the shutter
button halfway (
=
58). If you are too close to the subject, move away
and shoot again.
z
Multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.
If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions
are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can
take the picture.
z
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the
subject.
If the focus mode is currently MF, set it to AF.
z
The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject
due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EL/EX series Speedlite
(sold separately,
=
300) is recommended.
z
When the external ash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct the ash light. If the
subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with ash.
74
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right
to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better
perspective.
Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the
focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button
pressed halfway, and then press the shutter button completely to take the
picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
(<
A
> only)
After you press the shutter button halfway and a blue AF point appears, the
camera detects subject movement and focuses using Servo AF. Keep the
subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at
the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.
75
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Scene Icons
The camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the
scene. The detected scene type is indicated
on the upper left of the screen. For icon
details, see
=
587.
Adjusting Settings by Touching the Screen
By tapping icons, you can adjust settings.
76
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Shooting with Eects Applied (Creative Assist)
1
Press the <Q> button.
z
Read the message and select [OK].
2
Select an eect.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
eect, then press <
0
>.
3
Select the eect level and other
details.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to set it, then
press <
0
>.
z
To reset the setting, press the <
A
>
button, then select [OK].
Creative Assist Eects
z
[
] Preset
Select one of the preset eects.
Note that [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not
available with [B&W].
z
[ ] Background blur
Adjust background blur. Choose higher values to make backgrounds
sharper, or lower values to make them blurrier. [Auto] adjusts
background blurring to match the brightness. Depending on lens
brightness (f/number), some positions may not be available.
77
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
z
[ ] Brightness
Adjust image brightness.
z
[ ] Contrast
Adjust contrast.
z
[ ] Saturation
Adjust the vividness of colors.
z
[ ] Color tone 1
Adjust amber/blue color tone.
z
[ ] Color tone 2
Adjust green/magenta color tone.
z
[ ] Monochrome
Set the toning eect for monochrome shooting. Set to [O] to shoot in
color. [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not available
with options other than [O].
z
[Background blur] is not available when the ash is used.
z
These settings are reset when you switch shooting modes or set the power
switch to <
2
>. To save the settings, set [
z
: Retain Creative Assist data]
to [Enable].
Saving Eects
To save the current setting to the camera, press the <
B
> button on the
Creative Assist setting screen, then select [OK]. Up to three presets can be
saved as [USER*]. After three have been saved, an existing [USER*] preset
must be overwritten to save a new one.
78
Special Scene Mode (SCN)
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you
select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
* <
8
> stands for Special Scene.
1
Set the Mode dial to <8>.
2
Press <0>.
3
Select a shooting mode.
z
Press the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select the
shooting mode, then press <
0
>.
z
Cautions on each shooting mode are listed together (
=
92). Read the
cautions before shooting.
z
The Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [
5
: Mode guide] is set to
[Disable]. Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a shooting mode.
z
Take some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the desired results.
79
Special Scene Mode (SCN)
Available Shooting Modes in the
8
Mode
Shooting mode Page Shooting mode Page
J
Self Portrait
=
80
4
Close-up
=
87
2
Portrait
=
81
P
Food
=
88
K
Smooth skin
=
82
6
Night Portrait
=
89
3
Landscape
=
83
F
Handheld Night Scene
=
90
5
Sports
=
84
G
HDR Backlight Control
=
91
r
Panning
=
85
z
You can also set the shooting mode from [
z
: Shooting mode] after setting
the Mode dial to <
8
>.
80
Self Portrait Mode
To take shots of yourself, use [
J
] (Self Portrait) mode. Rotate the screen
around toward the lens. Customizable image processing includes skin
smoothing as well as brightness and background adjustment to make
yourself stand out.
Shooting Tips
z
Set the brightness and smooth skin eect.
[Brightness] and [Smooth skin eect] can be set in a range of ve
levels. In [Background], you can adjust the level of background blurring.
z
Tap on the screen to shoot.
Besides pressing the shutter button completely to shoot, you can also
shoot by tapping the screen, once you enable Touch Shutter by tapping
[
y
] to change it to [
x
].
81
Portrait Mode
The [
2
] (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject
stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
z
Select the location where the distance between the subject
and the background is the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the more
blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand out better
against an uncluttered dark background.
z
Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to ll the frame with the
subject from the waist up.
z
Focus on the face.
As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before
you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [
z
: Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.
z
Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [
i
] (Low-speed continuous shooting). If you keep
holding down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture
changes in the subject’s facial expression and pose.
82
Smooth Skin Mode
Use [
K
] (Smooth skin) mode to make skin look more attractive. Image
processing makes skin look smoother.
Shooting Tips
z
Adjust the face size.
Frames are displayed around any main subjects detected for skin
smoothing. For more eective skin smoothing, you can adjust the size so
that the frame is displayed on the subject’s face.
z
Focus on the face.
As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before
you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [
z
: Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.
83
Landscape Mode
Use the [
3
] (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very
sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
z
With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the
objects near and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.
z
Keep the camera steady when shooting night scenes.
Shooting with [
3
] while handholding the camera may cause camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
84
Sports Mode
Use the [
5
] (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running
person or a moving vehicle.
(1)
Shooting Tips
z
Use a telephoto lens.
Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a
distance.
z
Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
By default, [
z
: AF method] is set to [
u
+Tracking]. An Area AF frame
(1) appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject
is in focus, the AF point turns blue.
z
Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [
o
] (High-speed continuous shooting). At the
decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the shot.
To track the subject and capture changes as it moves, keep holding
down the shutter button to shoot continuously.
85
Panning Mode
If you want to take a picture with the feel of speed and a blurred motion
eect on the subject’s background, use [
r
] (Panning). If you use a lens
supporting the [
r
] mode, subject blur is detected, corrected, and reduced.
Shooting Tips
z
Turn the camera to follow the moving subject.
When shooting, turn the camera smoothly as you track the moving
subject. Aim the AF point over the part of the moving subject where you
want to focus, then press the shutter button halfway and keep holding
it down as you turn the camera to match the subject’s speed and
movement. Press the shutter button completely while moving the camera
to take the picture. Keep tracking the subject with the camera.
86
Panning Mode
z
Set the level of background motion blur.
With [Eect], you can set the level of background motion blur. The [Max]
setting will set a slower shutter speed to increase the background motion
blur around the subject. If the subject blur is noticeable, set [Eect] to
[Med] or [Min] to reduce the blur.
z
Shoot continuously.
By default, [
i
] (Continuous shooting) is set. At the decisive moment,
press the shutter button completely to take the picture. You can track
moving subjects by panning the camera as you keep holding down the
shutter button to shoot continuously.
z
To see which lenses support the [
r
] mode, refer to the Canon website.
z
With lenses that support [
r
] mode, the camera automatically corrects subject
blur and (based on the [Eect] setting) adjusts shutter speed, regardless of the
lens IS setting.
z
The AF method can only be set to [1-point AF] or [Zone AF]. By default, it is
set to [Zone AF], with the zone in the center of the screen selected.
z
To prevent camera shake, it is recommended that you hold the camera with
both hands, tighten your arms close to your body, and track the subject’s
movement smoothly to take pictures.
z
This eect is most eective with trains, cars, etc. that move at a constant speed
in one direction.
z
Taking test shots or checking the image by playing it back immediately after
shooting is recommended.
z
With telephoto lenses, be careful about camera shake and subject blur.
To avoid camera shake, consider using a tripod or monopod.
z
Continuous shooting in [
r
] mode captures up to approx. 4.0 shots
per second.
87
Close-up Mode
When you want to shoot owers or small things up close, use the [
4
]
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro
lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
z
Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as owers stand out
better.
z
Move in as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <
V
> (focal plane) mark on
the top of the camera to the subject. Focusing is not possible if you are
too close.
z
With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the subject
look larger.
88
Food Mode
When you want to take pictures of food, use [
P
] (Food). The photo will look
bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge
will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.
Shooting Tips
z
Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge, set it
toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
89
Night Portrait Mode
When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural-looking
night scene in the background, use the [
6
] (Night Portrait) mode. Note
that shooting in this mode requires the built-in ash or an external
Speedlite. Using a tripod is recommended.
Shooting Tips
z
Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night
view. Also, since camera shake is prone to occur with handheld shooting,
use a tripod.
z
Check the image brightness.
It is recommended to play back the captured image on location to check
the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and shoot
again.
z
Also shoot in other shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also with
<
A
> mode is recommended.
z
If you use the self-timer together with a ash, the self-timer lamp will light up
briey after the picture is taken.
90
Handheld Night Scene Mode
The [
F
] (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes
even while handholding the camera. In this shooting mode, four shots are
taken consecutively for each picture, and the resulting one image with
reduced camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
z
Hold the camera rmly.
During shooting, hold the camera rmly and steadily. In this mode, four
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
signicant misalignment in any of the four shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the nal image.
91
HDR Backlight Control Mode
When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the [
G
]
(HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this mode,
three consecutive shots are taken at dierent exposures. This results in one
image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the clipped shadows
caused by backlighting.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
Shooting Tips
z
Hold the camera rmly.
During shooting, hold the camera rmly and steadily. In this mode, three
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
signicant misalignment in any of the three shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the nal image.
92
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
J
: Self Portrait
z
Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on the shooting
conditions.
z
[Smooth skin eect] settings specied in [
J
] mode are not applied in [
K
]
mode.
z
[Background] is set to [Auto] and cannot be changed in [
I
] ash mode when
you have raised the ash.
K
: Smooth skin
z
Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on the shooting
conditions.
z
Setting details in [
K
] mode are not applied in [
J
] mode.
3
: Landscape
z
Flash photography is not possible.
5
: Sports
z
Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the shutter speed value in
the lower left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.
z
The built-in ash will not re. Using an external Speedlite will decrease the
continuous shooting speed.
r
: Panning
z
The shutter speed will become slower. Therefore, this mode is not suitable for
any shooting except for panning.
z
By default, [
i
] is set. Note that [
E
] or [
o
] cannot be selected.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
Although lens IS is applied to images captured with lenses supporting [
r
]
mode, the eect is not shown on the screen as you shoot. (IS and subject blur
correction are activated when you shoot, regardless of the lens IS setting.)
z
If the lens does not support the [
r
] mode, subject blur will not be corrected.
However, the automatic shutter speed adjustment alone will take eect
according to the setting of [Eect].
z
When shooting under bright light such as a sunny summer day or when
shooting a slow subject, the set degree of panning eect may not be obtained.
93
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
r
: Panning (continued)
z
With a lens supporting the [
r
] mode, subject blur may not be corrected
properly when shooting the following subjects or under the following shooting
conditions.
y
Subjects with very low contrast.
y
Subjects in low light.
y
Strongly backlit or reective subjects.
y
Subjects with repetitive patterns.
y
Subjects with less patterns or monotonous patterns.
y
Subjects with reections (images reected in glass, etc.).
y
Subjects smaller than the Zone AF frame.
y
When there are multiple subjects moving within the Zone AF frame.
y
Subjects moving in irregular directions or at irregular speeds.
y
Subjects whose movements are partly irregular. (For example, the vertical
movement of a runner.)
y
Subjects whose speed changes dramatically. (For example, right after the
start of movement or while turning along a curve.)
y
When you move the camera too fast or too slow.
y
When the camera’s movement does not match the subject’s movement.
y
When the lens focal length is long.
P
: Food
z
The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
z
When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
z
If you use a ash, [Color tone] will be set to Standard.
z
If there are people in the picture, the skin tone may not be reproduced properly.
94
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
6
: Night Portrait
z
Tell subjects to remain still for a moment after the ash res.
z
Focusing may be dicult when subject faces look dark. In this case, set the
focus mode to MF and focus manually (
=
7,
=
52).
z
Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be dicult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, set the focus mode to MF and focus manually
(
=
7,
=
52).
z
Shots will look slightly dierent from the image as displayed on the screen.
z
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the
shutter speed or ISO speed for ash shots to reduce washed-out highlights
and shoot at optimal exposure. Depending on the lens, shutter speeds and ISO
speeds displayed when you press the shutter button halfway may not match
the settings in ash shots. This may alter the brightness of backgrounds that
are out of ash range.
F
: Handheld Night Scene
z
Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
z
RAW image quality cannot be set.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be dicult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, set the focus mode to MF and focus manually
(
=
7,
=
52).
z
Shots will look slightly dierent from the image as displayed on the screen.
95
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
F
: Handheld Night Scene (continued)
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
z
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
z
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is nished.
G
: HDR Backlight Control
z
Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
z
RAW image quality cannot be set.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may
look irregular or have signicant noise.
z
HDR Backlight Control may not be eective for excessively backlit scenes or
extremely high-contrast scenes.
z
When shooting subjects that are suciently bright as they are, for example for
normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the HDR eect.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
z
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
z
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is nished.
96
Creative Filters Mode
You can shoot with lter eects applied. You can preview lter eects before
shooting.
1
Set the Mode dial to <U>.
2
Press <0>.
3
Select a lter eect.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select a lter
eect (
=
98–
=
99), then press
<
0
>.
z
The image is shown with the lter eect
applied.
4
Adjust the eect and shoot.
z
Press the <
Q
> button and select an
icon below [Creative lters] (except
c
,
A
,
B
,
C
, or
D
).
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to adjust the
eect, then press <
0
>.
97
Creative Filters Mode
z
RAW and RAW+JPEG are not available. When RAW image quality is set,
images are captured with
73
image quality. When RAW+JPEG image quality
is set, images are captured with the specied JPEG image quality.
z
Continuous shooting is not available when [
I
], [
G
], [
X
], [
K
], [
H
], or [
c
]
is set.
z
Dust Delete Data (
=
174) is not added to [
X
] shots.
z
With [
I
], the grainy preview will dier somewhat from the appearance of your
shots.
z
With [
G
] or [
c
] options, the soft focus preview may dier somewhat from the
appearance of your shots.
z
No histogram is displayed.
z
A magnied view is not available.
z
In Creative Zone modes, these settings are available from the Quick Control
screen: [
I
], [
G
], [
X
], [
J
], [
K
], [
H
], and [
c
].
z
Take some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the desired results.
98
Creative Filters Mode
Creative Filter Characteristics
z
I
Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast,
you can change the black-and-white eect.
z
G
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the
degree of softness.
z
X
Fish-eye eect
Gives the eect of a sh-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this lter eect, the area trimmed along the
periphery of the image changes. Also, because this lter eect magnies
the center of the image, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels, so set the lter
eect while checking the resulting image. One AF point is used, xed at
the center.
z
K
Water painting eect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors.
By adjusting the eect, you can change the color density. Note that night
scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have signicant noise.
z
H
Toy camera eect
Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners
of the image. Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.
99
Creative Filters Mode
z
c
Miniature eect
Creates a diorama eect.
Shooting under the default setting will keep the center looking sharp.
You can move the area that looks sharp (the scene frame) as described
in “Miniature Eect Operations” (
=
101). 1-point AF is used as the
AF method. Shooting with the AF point and scene frame aligned is
recommended.
z
A
HDR art standard
Photos retain more detail in highlights and shadows. With reduced
contrast and atter gradation, the nish resembles a painting. The subject
outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
z
B
HDR art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [HDR art standard], and the
low contrast and at gradation create a graphic art eect.
z
C
HDR art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and the
picture looks like an oil painting.
z
D
HDR art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are decreased to
make the picture look at. The picture looks faded and old. The subject
outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
z
With [
A
], [
B
], [
C
], and [
D
], you can shoot high dynamic range
photos that retain detail in highlights and shadows of high-contrast scenes.
Three consecutive images are captured at dierent brightnesses each time you
shoot and used to create a single image. See the cautions on
=
100.
100
Creative Filters Mode
[
A
], [
B
], [
C
], and [
D
] Notes
z
Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
z
Filter eect previews will not look exactly the same as your shots.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
z
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
z
Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots.
z
The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly.
Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
z
Shooting under uorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
z
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is nished.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
101
Creative Filters Mode
Miniature Eect Operations
1
Move the AF point.
z
Press the <
S
> button twice to enable
movement of the AF point, which turns
orange.
z
Use the <
V
> cross keys to move the
AF point to the position to focus on.
2
Move the scene frame.
z
Move the scene frame if the AF point
is outside of it, so that the AF point is
aligned with it.
z
To make the scene frame movable
(displayed in orange), press the <
S
>
button or tap [
r
] in the lower right of the
screen.
z
By tapping [
T
], you can also switch
between vertical and horizontal scene
frame orientation.
z
Switching scene frame orientation is
possible with the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys when
in horizontal orientation and <
W
> <
X
>
keys when in vertical orientation.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> or <
Y
> <
Z
> keys
to move the scene frame. To center the
scene frame again, press the <
B
>
button.
z
To conrm the position of the scene
frame, press <
0
>.
3
Take the picture.
102
103103
Creative Zone
Creative Zone modes give you the freedom
to shoot in a variety of ways by setting your
preferred shutter speed, aperture value,
exposure, and more.
z
To clear the shooting mode description displayed when you turn
the Mode dial, press <
0
> (
=
492).
104
Program AE Mode (P)
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the
subject’s brightness.
* <
d
> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode dial to <d>.
2
Focus on the subject.
z
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
3
Check the display and shoot.
z
As long as the exposure value is not
blinking, standard exposure will be
obtained.
z
If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink, it indicates
underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use ash.
z
If the “1/4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number blink, it indicates
overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND lter (sold separately) to reduce the amount
of light entering the lens.
105
Program AE Mode (P)
Dierences Between <
d
> and <
A
> Modes
z
In <
A
> mode, many functions, such as the AF method and metering mode,
are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set
are limited. On the other hand, with <
d
> mode, only the shutter speed and
aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF method, metering
mode, and other functions.
Program Shift
z
To adjust the combination of shutter speed and aperture value while
maintaining the same exposure, press the shutter button halfway and turn the
<
6
> dial. This is called Program shift.
z
Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends
(exposure setting display turns o).
z
Program shift cannot be used with ash.
106
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv)
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets
the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the
subject. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject.
A slower shutter speed can create a blurred eect, giving the impression of
motion.
* <
s
> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)
1
Set the Mode dial to <s>.
2
Set the desired shutter speed.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set it.
3
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Check the display and shoot.
z
As long as the aperture value is not
blinking, the standard exposure will be
obtained.
107
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv)
z
If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <
6
> dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops
blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
z
If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <
6
> dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture stops
blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
z
For example, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.
108
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av)
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter
speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject
brightness. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the
foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand,
a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* <
f
> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
1
Set the Mode dial to <f>.
2
Set the desired aperture.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set it.
3
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Check the display and shoot.
z
As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will be
obtained.
109
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av)
z
If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <
6
> dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/number) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed.
z
If the “1/4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <
6
> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher f/number) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
z
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The f/number
displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera,
“F00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Checking the Area in Focus
M
Press the button you have assigned to depth-of-eld preview (using
[
8
:
C.Fn III-2: Customize buttons], (
=
535)) to stop down the lens to
the current aperture setting and check the area in focus (depth of eld).
z
The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground
to the background.
z
Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the button assigned to
depth-of-eld preview.
z
Pressing the button assigned to depth-of-eld previewing when a Speedlite
470EX-AI is attached with the <
X
> switch set to <
Z
> (full auto) starts AI.B
full-auto distance measurement.
110
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired.
To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a
commercially available exposure meter.
* <
a
> stands for Manual.
1
Set the Mode dial to <a>.
2
Set the ISO speed (=143).
z
With ISO Auto, you can set exposure
compensation (
=
111).
3
Set the shutter speed and aperture.
z
To set the shutter speed, turn the <
6
>
dial. To set the aperture, turn the <
5
>
dial.
(2) (1)
4
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
z
Check the exposure level mark [
N
] to
see how far the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level.
(1) Standard exposure index
(2) Exposure level mark
5
Set the exposure and take the
picture.
z
Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
111
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can
set exposure compensation (
=
140) as follows:
z
Touch the exposure level indicator
z
[
z
: Expo.comp./AEB]
z
Quick Control screen
z
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the standard
exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore, you may
not obtain the desired exposure eect. In this case, set the exposure
compensation.
z
With the camera set to the <
a
> mode + ISO Auto + [
q
] (Evaluative metering)
and [
8
: C.Fn I-7: AE lock meter. mode after focus] set to the default setting
(
=
531), holding down the shutter button halfway will lock the ISO speed after
focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.
z
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <
A
> button to lock the ISO speed.
z
To compare the current exposure to the exposure when you pressed the
<
A
> button initially with a manually set ISO speed, press the <
A
> button,
recompose the shot, and check the exposure level indicator.
z
With ISO Auto set and [
8
: C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments] set to
[1/2-stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the
ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed displayed
will not change.
112
Flexible-priority AE (Fv)
In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed manually
or automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure
compensation. Shooting in <
t
> mode, with control over each of these
parameters, is equivalent to shooting in <
d
>, <
s
>, <
f
>, or <
a
>
mode.
* <
t
> stands for Flexible value.
1
Set the Mode dial to <t>.
2
Set the shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO speed.
z
Turn the <
5
> dial to select an item to
set. A [
6
] icon appears to the left of
the selected item.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set the option.
z
To reset the setting to [AUTO], press the
<
X
> key.
3
Set the amount of exposure
compensation.
z
Turn the <
5
> dial and select the
exposure level indicator. A [
6
] icon
appears to the left of the exposure level
indicator.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set the option.
z
To reset the setting to [±0], press the
<
X
> key.
113
Flexible-priority AE (Fv)
Combinations of Functions in <
t
> Mode
Shutter Speed Aperture Value ISO Speed
Exposure
Compensation
Shooting
Mode
[AUTO] [AUTO]
[AUTO]
Available
Similar to
<
d
>
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
Available
Similar to
<
s
>
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
Available
Similar to
<
f
>
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
[AUTO] Available
Similar to
<
a
>
Manual
selection
―
z
Blinking values indicate that the values set will cause underexposure or
overexposure. Adjust the exposure until the value stops blinking.
z
Slow synchro is not used under low light when you have set up <
t
> mode
to resemble <
f
> or <
d
> mode, even when [Slow synchro] in [
z
: Flash
control] is set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
z
Values for shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO] are
underlined.
114
115115
Shooting
This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on
the shooting ([
z
]) tab.
116116
Still Photo Shooting
z
A
M
icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available
only in Creative Zone <
t
>, <
d
>, <
s
>, <
f
>, or <
a
> mode.
117
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
z
Shooting 1
=
122
=
125
=
127
=
128
=
289
=
133
=
137
z
Shooting 2
=
140, 141
=
143
=
277
=
149
=
150
z
Shooting 3
=
151
=
153
=
154
118
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
z
Shooting 4
=
155
=
158
=
160
=
162
=
163, 166, 169
z
Shooting 5
=
171
=
172
=
174
=
176
=
180
z
Shooting 6
=
184
=
186
=
187
=
190
=
193
119
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
z
Shooting 7
=
195
=
198
=
209
=
211
=
212
=
214
=
215
z
Shooting 8
=
220
=
216
=
270
=
221
z
Shooting 9
=
241
=
248
=
271
=
279
z
[Touch & drag AF settings] is displayed when an optional electronic
viewnder is attached.
120
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
In Basic Zone modes, the following screens are displayed.
z
Shooting 1
=
78, 96
=
122
=
125
=
127
=
289
=
133
z
Shooting 2
=
76
=
184
=
187
=
222
z
[Shooting mode] or [AF method] is available in <
8
> or <
U
> mode.
z
[Retain Creative Assist data] is available in <
A
> mode.
z
[Digest type] is available in <
D
> mode.
121
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
z
Shooting 3
=
198
=
209
=
211
=
212
=
215
z
Shooting 4
=
220
=
216
=
270
=
221
z
Shooting 5
=
241
=
248
=
271
z
[Touch & drag AF settings] is displayed when an optional electronic
viewnder is attached.
z
[MF peaking settings] is available in <
8
> or <
U
> mode.
122
Image Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality.
1
Select [z: Image quality].
2
Set the image quality.
z
To select the RAW quality, turn the
<
6
> dial, and to select the JPEG
quality, press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
z
Number of shots available as indicated by [****] on the image quality setting
screen always applies to a setting of [3:2], regardless of the actual aspect ratio
setting (
=
125).
z
If [–] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image,
73
will be set.
z
If you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will be
recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image-
recording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with the
same le numbers (le extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR3 for RAW).
z
b
is in
7
(Fine) quality.
z
Meaning of image quality icons:
1
RAW,
F
Compact RAW, JPEG,
7
Fine,
8
Normal,
3
Large,
4
Medium,
6
Small.
123
Image Quality
RAW Images
RAW images are raw data from the image sensor that are recorded to the
card digitally as
1
or
F
(smaller than
1
) les, depending on your
selection.
RAW images can be processed using [
3
: RAW image processing]
(
=
341) to save them as JPEGs. As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of JPEG
images with various processing conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW
images. You can make various adjustments to images depending upon how
they will be used and can generate JPEG or other types of images reecting
the eects of those adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
z
To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(hereafter DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
z
Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this
camera. If a previous version of DPP (Ver.4.x) is installed on your computer,
obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon website to update it
(
=
550). (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or
earlier cannot process RAW images taken with this camera.
z
Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images
taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software
manufacturer.
Guide to Image Quality Settings
For guidelines on le sizes, number of possible shots, and maximum burst
shots, see
=
577.
124
Image Quality
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The estimated maximum burst is shown on
the top of the shooting screen.
z
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches 98
or less. [BUSY] display indicates that internal memory is full and shooting
will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will
increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you can resume
continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on
=
577.
125
Still Image Aspect Ratio
You can change the image’s aspect ratio.
1
Select [z: Still img aspect ratio].
2
Set the aspect ratio.
z
Select an aspect ratio, then press
<
0
>.
z
JPEG images
The images will be recorded with the set aspect ratio.
z
RAW images
The images will always be recorded in the [3:2] aspect ratio.
The selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image le.
When you process the RAW image with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software), this allows you to generate an image with the same
aspect ratio set for shooting.
126
Still Image Aspect Ratio
Aspect Ratio
4:3 16:9 1:1
z
When you play back RAW images shot in the [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] aspect ratio,
they will be displayed with lines indicating the respective aspect ratio.
(These lines are not recorded in the image.)
127
Image Review Time
Set to [Hold] to keep shots displayed immediately after you shoot, or set to
[O] if you prefer not to have shots displayed.
1
Select [z: Image review].
2
Set a time option.
z
When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in
[
5
: Power saving].
128
M
Lens Aberration Correction
Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical
characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using
[Lens aberration correction].
1
Select [z: Lens aberration
correction].
2
Select an item.
3
Select [Enable].
z
Conrm that the name of the attached
lens and (except for diraction
correction) [Correction data available]
are displayed.
z
If [Correction data not available]
or [
] is displayed, see “Digital Lens
Optimizer” (
=
130).
129
Lens Aberration Correction
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.
z
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
z
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
z
The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount that applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
z
Peripheral illumination is corrected automatically in Basic Zone modes when
correction data is registered on the camera.
Distortion Correction
Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.
z
To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the
area seen when shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the
apparent resolution.
z
Setting distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
z
When you magnify images, distortion correction is not applied to the images
displayed.
z
Distortion correction is not applied in movie recording.
z
Images with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete Data
(
=
174) appended. Also, the AF point may be displayed out of position,
relative to the time of shooting.
130
Lens Aberration Correction
Digital Lens Optimizer
Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along
with diraction and low-pass lter-induced loss of clarity.
If [Correction data not available] or [
] is displayed by [Digital Lens
Optimizer], you can use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the
camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
z
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensied together with the
eects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture
Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before
shooting.
z
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
z
For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is
not possible.)
z
Enabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] corrects both chromatic aberration and
diraction, although these options are not displayed.
z
Digital Lens Optimizer is applied automatically in Basic Zone modes when
correction data is registered on the camera.
131
Lens Aberration Correction
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.
z
[Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is
enabled.
Diraction Correction
Diraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.
z
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensied together with the
eects of correction.
z
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
z
For movie recording, [Diraction correction] will not appear. (Correction is not
possible.)
z
With “Diraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass lter, etc.
is corrected in addition to diraction. Therefore, correction is eective even at
an aperture close to the open aperture.
z
[Diraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is
enabled.
132
Lens Aberration Correction
General Cautions for Lens Aberration Correction
z
Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion
correction, and diraction correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already
taken.
z
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
z
Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will
not be recorded.
z
The correction amount will be less (except for diraction correction) if the lens
used does not have distance information.
General Notes for Lens Aberration Correction
z
The eect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used
and shooting conditions. Also, the eect may be dicult to discern depending
on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
z
If the correction is dicult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after
shooting is recommended.
z
Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter is
attached.
z
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the
result will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for
diraction correction).
z
If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.
133
Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive
mode suiting the scene or subject.
1
Select [z: Drive mode].
2
Set the drive mode.
z
[
u
] Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be
taken.
z
[
E
] High speed continuous shooting +/[
o
] High speed
continuous shooting
Captures a series of shots in rapid succession while you hold down
the shutter button completely. [
E
] takes up to approx. 14 shots per
second, and [
o
], up to approx. 7.0 shots per second. However,
the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower under the
following conditions:
When set to reduce icker:
The continuous shooting speed will be max. approx. 5.2 shots
per second.
z
[
i
] Low-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots per second while you keep
holding it down.
134
Drive Mode
z
[
m
/
Q
] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
z
[
l
/
k
] Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
z
[
q
] Self-timer: Continuous shooting
z
Conditions for maximum high-speed continuous shooting speed (
=
133)
for [
E
] or [
o
] are as follows: shooting with a fully charged battery at a
1/1000 sec. or faster shutter speed and maximum aperture (which varies
depending on the lens), at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), with icker
reduction disabled.
z
The maximum continuous shooting speed for [
E
] and [
o
] high-speed
continuous shooting may be slower depending on factors such as the battery
level, temperature, icker reduction, shutter speed, aperture value, subject
conditions, brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of ash, and shooting
settings.
z
With Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower
depending on subject conditions or the lens used.
z
With [
z
: Anti-icker shoot.] set to [Enable] (
=
193), shooting under
ickering light may decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed. Also,
the continuous shooting interval may become irregular and the release time lag
may become longer.
z
Even with low-speed continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed may
become slower depending on the shooting conditions.
z
When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous
shooting speed may drop o because shooting will be temporarily disabled
(
=
124).
z
Subject tracking is easier with [
E
] or [
i
], because real-time images are
displayed between shots in continuous shooting.
z
For self-timer shooting, see
=
135. For remote control shooting, see
=
223.
135
Self-Timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a
commemorative photograph.
1
Select [z: Drive mode].
2
Set the self-timer.
z
m
(
Q
): Shoot in 10 sec.
l
(
k
): Shoot in 2 sec.
q
: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for
the specied number of shots*
* To set the number of continuous shots
(2–10), turn the <
6
> dial.
z
Q
and
k
icons are displayed when
the camera is paired with a wireless
remote control (sold separately,
=
223).
3
Take the picture.
z
Focus on the subject, then press the
shutter button completely.
z
To check operation, look at the self-timer
lamp, listen for beeps, or watch the
countdown in seconds on the screen.
z
Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and
the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec.
before the picture is taken.
136
Self-Timer
z
With [
q
], the shooting interval may be longer depending on image quality,
use of external ash, and other shooting conditions.
z
[
l
] enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted on a tripod.
This prevents camera shake if you shoot still-life or long exposures.
z
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (
=
304) to check focus
and exposure is recommended.
z
When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (
=
74) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
z
To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press <
0
>.
z
Auto power o time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
137
M
RAW Burst Mode
Enables fast continuous shooting of RAW images. Useful for choosing the
best shot, taken at exactly the right moment, from your captured images.
Images captured are saved in a single le (roll). You can extract any image
from the roll to save it separately (
=
319).
1
Select [z: RAW burst mode].
2
Select [RAW burst mode].
3
Select [Enable].
z
After you select [Enable], [
] is
displayed when you shoot.
4
Select [Pre-shooting].
138
RAW Burst Mode
5
Set an option.
z
[Enable]: Shooting begins slightly
before (up to approx. 0.5 sec. before)
you press the shutter button all the way
down, after you initially hold it down
halfway momentarily.
[
] is displayed when you shoot.
z
[Disable]: Shooting begins when you
press the shutter button completely.
[
] is displayed when you shoot.
6
Take the picture.
z
An on-screen indicator shows buer
status.
z
Pressing the shutter button completely
shoots continuously until the buer
becomes full, or until you release the
button.
139
RAW Burst Mode
z
Use cards with 4 GB or more of free space.
z
Images may not be captured correctly if the battery runs out during image
processing while you are shooting in RAW burst mode with a slow-writing card
and low battery.
z
Display pauses when you press the shutter button halfway.
z
Camera shake or subject motion may cause image distortion.
z
ISO Auto is used when shooting in <
d
>, <
s
>, and <
f
> modes.
z
Shutter speeds slower than 1/30 sec. are not available in <
s
>, <
a
>,
or <
t
> mode.
z
Approx. 17.9 megapixels (5184×3456) are used in shooting.
z
Images are captured using the electronic shutter. Before you shoot, reading
“Shutter Release Method” (
=
186) is recommended.
z
Captured images will have a slightly narrower angle of view.
z
To view images in rolls on a computer, either extract JPEGs or use the EOS
application Digital Photo Professional.
z
If you connect the camera to a computer and use EOS Utility (EOS software),
set [
z
: RAW burst mode] to [Disable]. If [Enable] is selected, the camera
cannot communicate with the computer.
z
Maximum burst may be lower under low light.
z
In RAW burst mode, the aperture value will change if you zoom while pressing
the shutter button halfway or completely with zoom lenses that have variable
maximum aperture. To maintain the same exposure in <
a
> mode, shooting
with ISO Auto is recommended.
z
In RAW burst mode, even with some zoom lenses that do not have variable
maximum aperture, exposure may change if you zoom while pressing the
shutter button halfway or completely. For details, refer to the Canon website.
z
UHS-II SD Speed Class 10 or higher memory cards are recommended.
z
RAW images captured are saved in a single le (roll). File names begin with
CSI_ and end with the .CR3 le extension.
z
Picture Style, white balance, and Auto Lighting Optimizer settings determined
for the rst shot are applied as you shoot.
z
The camera does not beep as you are shooting.
z
[RAW burst mode] switches to [Disable] when the power switch is set to
<
2
>.
140
M
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <
t
>, <
d
>, <
s
>, <
f
>, and
<
a
> shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops
in 1/3-stop increments.
For details on exposure compensation when <
a
> mode and ISO Auto are
both set, see
=
111, and see
=
112 for <
t
> mode.
1
Set the compensation amount.
z
With the shutter button pressed halfway,
watch the screen and set by turning the
<
5
> dial.
z
A [
O
] icon is displayed to indicate
exposure compensation.
2
Take the picture.
z
To cancel exposure compensation, set
the exposure level indicator [
N
] to the
standard exposure index ([
C
]).
z
If [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (
=
149) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
z
The exposure compensation amount will remain in eect even after you set the
power switch to <
2
>.
141
M
Auto Exposure Bracketing
You can capture three images at dierent shutter speeds, aperture values,
and ISO speeds, as adjusted by the camera. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1
Select [z: Expo.comp./AEB].
(1)
2
Set the AEB range.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set the AEB range
(1). Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to set the
exposure compensation level.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
z
When you close the menu, the AEB
range will be displayed on the screen.
3
Take the picture.
z
Three bracketed shots will be taken
according to the drive mode set in
this sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
z
AEB will not be automatically canceled.
To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to turn o
the AEB range display.
142
Auto Exposure Bracketing
z
If [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (
=
149) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the eect of AEB may be reduced.
z
[
A
] blinks in the lower left of the screen during AEB shooting.
z
If the drive mode is set to [
u
], press the shutter button three times for each
shot. When [
E
], [
o
], or [
i
] is set and you hold down the shutter button
completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively and the
camera will automatically stop shooting. When [
m
] or [
l
] is set, the three
bracketed shots will be taken consecutively after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
When set to [
q
], three times the specied number of shots are taken in
continuous shooting.
z
You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
z
AEB cannot be used with ash, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, or focus
bracketing, or in HDR or RAW burst mode.
z
AEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting the
power switch to <
2
> or when the ash is fully charged.
143
M
ISO Speed Settings
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient
light level. In Basic Zone modes, ISO speed is set automatically.
Regarding the ISO speed during movie recording, see
=
277,
=
581.
1
Press the <B> button (9).
z
With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <
B
> button.
2
Set the ISO speed.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial.
z
Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed
automatically.
144
ISO Speed Settings
ISO Speed Guide
z
Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of
camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of
eld), in some shooting conditions.
z
High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper
depth of eld), and longer ash range but may increase image noise.
z
Image noise (such as dots of light or banding) may increase and apparent
resolution may decrease at H (equivalent to ISO 51200), because this is an
expanded ISO speed.
z
If [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] (
=
150),
ISO 100/125/160 and H (equivalent to ISO 51200) cannot be selected.
z
When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, or long exposure,
image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding, etc.), irregular colors, or color
shift may become noticeable.
z
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as
a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images
may not be recorded properly.
z
If you use a high ISO speed and ash to shoot a close subject, overexposure
may result.
145
ISO Speed Settings
ISO Speed Range When Set Manually
1
Select [z: zISO speed settings].
2
Select [ISO speed range].
3
Set the minimum limit.
z
Select the minimum limit box, then press
<
0
>.
z
Select the ISO speed, then press
<
0
>.
4
Set the maximum limit.
z
Select the maximum limit box,
then press <
0
>.
z
Select the ISO speed, then press
<
0
>.
5
Select [OK].
146
ISO Speed Settings
ISO Speed Range Used With ISO Auto
1
Select [Auto range].
2
Set the minimum limit.
z
Select the minimum limit box, then press
<
0
>.
z
Select the ISO speed, then press
<
0
>.
3
Set the maximum limit.
z
Select the maximum limit box, then
press <
0
>.
z
Select the ISO speed, then press
<
0
>.
4
Select [OK].
z
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also function as the minimum and
maximum speeds for ISO speed safety shift (
=
531).
147
ISO Speed Settings
Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
You can set the minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto.
This can help reduce camera shake and subject blur in <
d
> or <
f
>
mode when shooting moving subjects with a wide-angle lens, or when using
a telephoto lens.
1
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
Automatically set
2
Set the desired minimum shutter
speed.
z
If you select [Auto], turn the <
6
> dial
to set a slower or faster speed, then
press <
0
>.
Manually set
z
If you select [Manual], turn the <
6
>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <
0
>.
148
ISO Speed Settings
z
If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set
with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter spd.] will be
set to obtain the standard exposure.
z
This function will not be applied to ash photography and movie recording.
z
When [Auto(Standard)] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the
reciprocal of the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is
equivalent to a single stop of the shutter speed.
149
M
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or
contrast is too low or high.
1
Select [z: Auto Lighting
Optimizer].
2
Set a correction option.
z
Noise may increase and clarity may change, under some shooting conditions.
z
If the eect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your
preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
z
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or
ash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come
out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
z
Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes
longer.
z
In step 2, if you press the <
B
> button and remove the checkmark [
X
] for
[Disable during man expo] setting, [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also
be set even in <
a
> mode.
150
M
Highlight Tone Priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1
Select [z: Highlight tone priority].
2
Set an option.
z
[Enable]: Improves gradation in
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes smoother.
z
[Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed
highlights even more than [Enable],
under some shooting conditions.
z
Noise may increase slightly.
z
The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot
be set.
z
[Enhanced] is not available when recording movies.
z
With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.
151
M
Metering Mode
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.
1
Select [z: Metering mode].
2
Set the metering mode.
z
[
q
] Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects.
The camera adjusts the exposure automatically to suit the scene.
z
[
w
] Partial metering
Eective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due
to backlight, etc. Covers approx. 4.5% of the area at the center of the
screen. The partial metering area is indicated on the screen.
z
[
r
] Spot metering
Eective when metering a specic part of the subject or scene.
Covers approx. 2.6% of the area at the center of the screen. The spot
metering area is indicated on the screen.
z
[
e
] Center-weighted average metering
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the
screen weighted more heavily.
152
Metering Mode
z
By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows.
With [
q
], holding down the shutter button halfway will lock the exposure
setting (AE lock) after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF. In the [
w
], [
r
],
and [
e
] modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
(Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)
z
With [
8
: C.Fn I-7: AE lock meter. mode after focus], you can set whether
or not to lock the exposure (AE lock) when focus is achieved with One-Shot AF
(
=
531).
153
M
Metering Timer
You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the
duration of exposure display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such
as pressing the shutter button halfway.
1
Select [z: Metering timer].
2
Set a time option.
154
M
Exposure Simulation
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure)
of the actual image will look.
1
Select [z: Expo. simulation].
2
Set an option.
z
Enable (
g
)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness
(exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the
image brightness will change accordingly.
z
During
e
Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to
see (
E
). Image brightness will only be close to the actual brightness
(exposure) of the resulting image while you hold down the button you
have assigned to [Depth-of-eld preview] (using [
8
: C.Fn III-2 :
Customize buttons], (
=
535)) (
g
).
z
Disable (
E
)
The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see.
Even if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the
standard brightness.
155
M
White Balance
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the
Auto [
Q
] (Ambience priority) or [
Q
w] (White priority) setting will obtain
the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with
Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it
manually by shooting a white object.
1
Select [z: White balance].
2
Select an item.
(Approx.)
Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
Q
Auto (Ambience priority,
=
157)
3000–7000
Q
w Auto (White priority,
=
157)
W
Daylight 5200
E
Shade 7000
R
Cloudy 6000
Y
Tungsten light 3200
U
White uorescent light 4000
D
Flash Automatically set*
O
Custom (
=
158) 2000–10000
P
Color temperature (
=
159) 2500–10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be xed to approx. 6000K.
156
White Balance
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is decided
depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and then the color
is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white. With this
function, you can take the pictures with natural color tones.
157
White Balance
[
Q
] Auto White Balance
With [
Q
], you can slightly increase the intensity of the image’s warm color
cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene.
If you select [
Q
w], you can reduce the intensity of the image’s warm color
cast.
1
Select [z: White balance].
2
Select [
Q
].
z
With [
Q
] selected, press the <
B
>
button.
3
Select an item.
Cautions for Setting [
Q
w]
z
The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
z
When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
z
When using ash, the color tone will be the same as with [
Q
].
158
White Balance
[
O
] Custom White Balance
With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for
the specic light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this
procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
1
Shoot a white object.
z
Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that white lls the screen.
z
Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
z
You can use any of the white balance
settings.
2
Select [z: Custom White Balance].
3
Import the white balance data.
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<
0
>.
Select [OK] to import the data.
4
Select [z: White balance].
5
Select the custom white balance.
z
Select [
O
].
159
White Balance
z
If the exposure obtained in step 1 diers greatly from the standard exposure,
a correct white balance may not be obtained.
z
These images cannot be selected: Images captured with Picture Style set to
[Monochrome], images with a Creative lter applied before or after shooting,
cropped images, or images shot with another camera.
z
Images that cannot be used in the setting may be displayed.
z
Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or standard
18% gray reector (commercially-available).
[
P
] Color Temperature
1
Select [z: White balance].
2
Set the color temperature.
z
Select [
P
].
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set the desired
color temperature, then press <
0
>.
z
The color temperature can be set from
approx. 2500K to 10000K in 100K
increments.
z
When setting the color temperature for an articial light source, set the white
balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
z
If you set [
P
] to the reading taken with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the
dierence between the color temperature meter’s reading and the camera’s
color temperature reading.
160
M
White Balance Correction/Bracketing
White balance correction has the same eect as using a commercially
available color temperature conversion lter or color compensating lter.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [z: WB Shift/Bkt.].
Sample setting: A2, G1
2
Set the white balance correction.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the
[■] mark to your preferred position.
z
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted toward the
color in the direction of the move.
On the right of the screen, [Shift]
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
z
Pressing the <
B
> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
z
Press <
0
> to exit the setting.
z
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color
temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color temperature
conversion lter.)
161
White Balance Correction/Bracketing
White Balance Auto Bracketing
White balance bracketing (WB Bkt.) enables you to capture three images at
once with dierent color tones.
B/A bias ±3 levels
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
z
In step 2 for “White Balance Correction”
(
=
160), when you turn the <
5
> dial,
the [■] mark on the screen will change
to [■ ■ ■] (3 points).
z
Turning the dial clockwise sets
the B/A bracketing, and turning
it counterclockwise sets the M/G
bracketing.
On the right, [Bracket] indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
z
Pressing the <
B
> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
z
Press <
0
> to exit the setting.
z
During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting
will be lower.
z
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the
image to the card.
z
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white
balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance,
2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
z
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance
bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing, a total
of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
z
The white balance icon blinks when white balance bracketing is set.
z
[Bracket] stands for bracketing.
162
M
Color Space
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. For normal
shooting, sRGB is recommended.
1
Select [z: Color space].
2
Set a color space option.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial
uses. Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-
compatible monitors or DCF 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.
z
If the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the rst character in the
le name will be an underscore “_”.
z
The ICC prole is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC prole,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).
z
In Basic Zone modes, [sRGB] is set automatically.
163
M
Picture Style Selection
Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
eectively matching your photographic expression or the subject.
1
Select [z: Picture Style].
2
Select a Picture Style.
Picture Style Characteristics
z
[
D
] Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors
will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature,
outdoor and sunset scenes.
z
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
z
[
P
] Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
z
[
Q
] Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (
=
167), you can adjust the skin tone.
164
Picture Style Selection
z
[
R
] Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Eective for impressive landscapes.
z
[
u
] Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and ne texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
z
[
S
] Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
z
[
U
] Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject
that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be
adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images
with modest brightness and color saturation.
z
[
V
] Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
z
Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.
z
[
W
] User Dened 1–3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a Picture
Style le, etc. and adjust it as desired (
=
169). With any of the User
Dened Picture Style that has not yet been set, pictures will be taken with
the same characteristics settings as with the default settings of [Auto].
165
Picture Style Selection
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other settings.
The numbers indicate the values for these settings specied for the
respective Picture Style.
g
Sharpness
A
Strength
B
Fineness
C
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter eect (Monochrome)
l
Toning eect (Monochrome)
z
During movie recording, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness]
and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
166
M
Picture Style Customization
You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings.
To customize [Monochrome], see
=
168.
1
Select [z: Picture Style].
2
Select a Picture Style.
z
Select the Picture Style to adjust, then
press the <
B
> button.
3
Select an item.
z
See “Settings and Eects” (
=
167) for
details on the settings and eects.
167
Picture Style Customization
4
Set the eect level.
z
Press the <
M
> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
z
Any settings you change from default
values are displayed in blue.
Settings and Eects
g
Sharpness
A
Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis
B
Fineness*
1
1: Fine 5: Grainy
C
Threshold*
2
1: Low 5: High
h
Contrast –4: Low contrast +4: High contrast
i
Saturation –4: Low saturation +4: High saturation
j
Color tone –4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone
*1: Indicates the neness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the number,
the ner the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the dierence in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the more
the outline will be emphasized when the contrast dierence is low. However, noise
tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
z
For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be
set (not displayed).
z
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter settings of
the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
z
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, rst select the adjusted Picture
Style, then shoot.
168
Picture Style Customization
[
V
] Monochrome Adjustment
Oers [Filter eect] and [Toning eect] options, besides the [Sharpness]
options ([Strength], [Fineness], and [Threshold]) and [Contrast] options
described on
=
167.
[
k
] Filter eect
With a lter eect applied to a monochrome
image, you can make white clouds or green
trees stand out more.
Filter Sample Eects
N: None Normal black-and-white image with no lter eects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
z
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the lter eect more pronounced.
[
l
] Toning eect
By applying a toning eect, you can create
a monochrome image in the selected color.
Eective when you want to create more
impressive images.
169
M
Picture Style Registration
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or
[User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with dierent
settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility
(EOS software) can also be modied here.
1
Select [z: Picture Style].
2
Select [User Def. *].
z
Select [User Def. *], then press the
<
B
> button.
3
Press <0>.
z
With [Picture Style] selected, press
<
0
>.
4
Select the base Picture Style.
z
Select the base Picture Style.
z
Also select styles this way when
adjusting styles registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software).
170
Picture Style Registration
5
Select an item.
6
Set the eect level.
z
For details, see “Picture Style
Customization” (
=
166).
z
Press the <
M
> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
The base Picture Style will be indicated
on the right of [User Def. *].
Blue style names indicate that you
have changed the settings from default
values.
z
If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base
Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User
Dened Picture Style.
z
Selecting [Basic settings] in [
5
: Reset camera] (
=
520) will restore all
[User Def. *] settings to defaults.
z
To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *],
then shoot.
z
Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style le to the camera, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
171
M
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding)
typical of long exposures can be reduced.
1
Select [z: Long exp. noise
reduction].
2
Set a reduction option.
z
[AUTO] Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]
setting is eective enough in most cases.
z
[ON] Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The
[Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the
[Auto] setting.
z
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.
z
Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or
[Auto] setting.
z
[BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not
displayed until processing is nished, when you can shoot again.
172
M
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. This function is
especially eective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at
low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas)
can further be reduced.
1
Select [z: High ISO speed NR].
2
Set the level.
z
[
M
] Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and
merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
173
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
z
If there is signicant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise
reduction eect may become smaller.
z
If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.
Using a tripod is recommended.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
z
Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or at, single-tone images.
z
If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken,
irregular exposure in the image may result.
z
After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. [BUSY] is displayed as
images are processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is nished.
z
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with bulb shooting, shooting with
AEB or WB bracketing, shooting RAW or RAW+JPEG images, or with features
such as long exposure noise reduction, or HDR mode.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when recording
movies.
z
The camera automatically switches to [Standard] if you set the power switch
to <
2
>, replace the battery or card, switch to a Basic Zone shooting mode,
or switch to movie recording.
174
M
Dust Delete Data Acquisition
Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in
case sensor cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is
used by Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
z
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
z
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
z
Switch to manual focus and set the focus to innity (∞).
Dust Delete Data Acquisition
1
Select [z: Dust Delete Data].
2
Select [OK].
z
After the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
mechanical sound of the shutter during
the cleaning, no picture is taken.
175
Dust Delete Data Acquisition
3
Shoot a plain white object.
z
Shoot with a plain white object (such
as a new sheet of white paper) lling
the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm
(0.7–1.0 ft.).
z
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there is
no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete Data.
When the Dust Delete Data is obtained,
a message will appear.
z
If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear.
After reviewing the information in
“Preparation” (
=
174), select [OK],
then shoot again.
Dust Delete Data Appending
The camera will append the Dust Delete Data obtained to all shots from
now on. Acquiring Dust Delete Data before shooting is recommended.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase
dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction
Manual.
File size is essentially unaected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.
z
If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
aect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
z
With [RAW burst mode], Dust Delete Data is not appended.
176
M
HDR Mode
You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a
high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is
eective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of dierent exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively
for each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR image is
recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1
Select [z: HDR Mode].
2
Set [Adjust dyn range].
z
Selecting [Auto] will have the dynamic
range set automatically depending on
the image’s overall tonal range.
z
The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
3
Set [Eect].
177
HDR Mode
Eects
z
[
P
] Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and shadows
will be reduced.
z
[
A
] Art standard
While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than with
[Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation atter to have the
picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark)
edges.
z
[
B
] Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and at gradation create a graphic art eect.
z
[
C
] Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and the
picture looks like an oil painting.
z
[
D
] Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are decreased to
make the picture look at. The picture looks faded and old. The subject
outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Art standard Art vivid Art bold Art embossed
Saturation Standard High Higher Low
Outline
emphasis
Standard Weak Strong Stronger
Brightness Standard Standard Standard Dark
Tone Flat Flat Flat Flatter
z
Each eect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
currently set (
=
163).
178
HDR Mode
4
Set a [Continuous HDR] option.
z
With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
z
With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 2 is set
to [Disable HDR].
5
Set [Auto Image Align] and shoot.
z
For handheld shooting, select [Enable].
When using a tripod, select [Disable].
z
RAW HDR images are captured in JPEG
73
image quality. RAW+JPEG HDR
images are captured in the specied JPEG image quality.
z
HDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (H). HDR shooting is
possible within ISO 100–25600 (varies depending on the settings of [Minimum]
and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]).
z
AEB shooting and ash photography are not available.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
z
In HDR shooting, three images are captured with dierent shutter speeds set
automatically. Even in <
t
>, <
s
>, and <
a
> modes, the shutter speed will
change, relative to your specied speed.
z
To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
179
HDR Mode
z
When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], AF point
display information (
=
370) and Dust Delete Data (
=
174) will not be
appended to the image.
z
If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be slightly lowered.
Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake, etc., auto
image alignment may not take eect. Note that when shooting with excessively
bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto image alignment may not work properly.
z
If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Disable],
the three images may not be properly aligned and the HDR eect may be
reduced. Using a tripod is recommended.
z
Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or at, single-tone images.
z
The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly.
Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
z
HDR shooting under uorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
z
With HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card, so
it may take some time. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and
shooting is not possible until processing is nished.
180
M
Focus Bracketing
Focus bracketing* enables continuous shooting with the focal distance
changed automatically after a single shot. From these images, you can
create a single image in focus over a wide area by using an application
that supports depth compositing, such as Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
* “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
1
Select [z: Focus bracketing].
2
Specify [Focus bracketing].
z
Select [Enable].
3
Set the number of images.
z
Specify the number of images captured
per shot.
z
Can be set in a range of [2]–[999].
181
Focus Bracketing
4
Set [Focus increment].
z
Specify how much to shift the focus.
This amount is automatically adjusted
to suit the aperture value at the time of
shooting.
Because larger aperture values increase
the focus shift, focus bracketing covers
a wider range under the same [Focus
increment] and [Number of shots]
settings in that case.
z
After completing the settings, press
<
0
>.
5
Set [Exposure smoothing].
z
You can suppress changes in image
brightness during focus bracketing
by setting [Exposure smoothing] to
[Enable], which adjusts dierences
relative to the actual aperture value
(eective f/number) that changes with
the focal position.
6
Take the picture.
z
To save your shots in a new folder,
tap [
] and select [OK].
z
Focus at the nearer end of your
preferred focal range, then press the
shutter button completely.
z
Once shooting begins, release the
shutter button.
z
The camera shoots continuously, shifting
the focal position toward innity.
z
Shooting ends after your specied
number of images, or at the far end of
the focal range.
182
Focus Bracketing
z
Focus bracketing is intended for still photo shooting on a tripod.
z
Shooting with a wider angle of view is recommended. After depth compositing,
you can crop the image if necessary.
z
The following lenses can be used (as of April 2019).
y
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
y
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
y
EF100mm f/2.8L MACRO IS USM
y
EF180mm f/3.5L MACRO USM
y
EF-M28mm f/3.5 MACRO IS STM
y
EF-M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM
y
EF-M18-150mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM
y
EF-S35mm f/2.8 MACRO IS STM
y
EF-S60mm f/2.8 MACRO USM
y
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
z
Set [Exposure smoothing] to [Disable] with the following lenses, because
they may cause changes in image brightness.
y
EF100mm f/2.8 L MACRO IS USM
y
EF180mm f/3.5 L MACRO USM
y
EF-S60mm f/2.8 MACRO USM
z
Suitable [Focus increment] settings vary by subject. An unsuitable [Focus
increment] setting may cause unevenness in composite images, or shooting
may take more time because more shots are taken. Take some test shots to
decide a suitable [Focus increment] setting.
z
Combining images may take some time when the [Number of shots] setting is
high.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
Shooting under ickering light may cause uneven images. In this case, lowering
the shutter speed may give better results.
z
Has no eect (focal position does not change) in MF focus mode.
z
Canceling shooting in progress may cause exposure problems in the last
image. Avoid using the last image when combining the images in Digital Photo
Professional.
183
Focus Bracketing
z
Use of a tripod, remote switch (sold separately,
=
223), or wireless remote
control (sold separately,
=
223) is recommended.
z
For best results, set the aperture value in a range of f/5.6–11 before shooting.
z
Details such as shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed are determined
by conditions for the rst shot.
z
To cancel shooting, press the shutter button completely again.
z
[Focus bracketing] switches to [Disable] when the power switch is set to
<
2
>.
z
If [
z
: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
184
Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture
automatically.
1
Enable the Touch Shutter.
z
Tap [
y
] on the screen’s bottom left.
z
Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [
y
] and [
x
].
z
[
x
] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you
tap on, then the picture will be taken.
z
[
y
] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on the spot. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
2
Tap on the screen to shoot.
z
Tap on the face or subject on the screen.
z
On the point you tap, the camera will
focus (Touch AF) with the AF method
that was set (
=
198).
z
When [
x
] is set, the AF point turns
green when focus is achieved, then the
picture is taken automatically.
z
If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot be
taken. Tap on the face or subject on the
screen again.
185
Touch Shutter
z
Even if you set the drive mode to [
E
], [
o
], or [
i
], the camera will still
shoot in the single shooting mode.
z
Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus on
the image with [One-Shot AF].
z
Tapping on the screen in magnied view will not focus or take the picture.
z
If you shoot by tapping on the screen with [
z
: Image review] set to [Hold],
you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.
z
To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The rst tap on the
screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb exposure.
Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the screen.
186
M
Shutter Release Method
You can choose how the shutter is released.
1
Select [z: Shutter mode].
2
Select an item.
z
Mechanical
Shooting activates the mechanical shutter. Be sure to set it to
[Mechanical] if you use a TS-E lens (except TS-E17mm f/4L or
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you use an
extension tube. If [Electronic] is set, the standard exposure may not be
obtained, or an irregular exposure may result.
z
Electronic
Enables you to shoot at a maximum 1/16000 sec. shutter speed without
a shutter sound.
Available with drive modes other than [
E
], [
o
], [
i
], or [
q
].
Flash photography is not possible.
z
With [Electronic], camera shake or subject motion may cause image distortion.
z
Setting the shutter mode to [Electronic] under ickering light may cause
noticeable screen ickering, and images may be captured with horizontal
stripes (noise) or irregular exposure.
187
Interval Timer
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and number of
shots, so that the camera takes individual shots repeatedly according to
your interval until your specied number of shots are taken.
1
Select [z: Interval timer].
2
Select [Enable].
z
Select [Enable], then press the <
B
>
button.
3
Set the shooting interval and
number of shots.
z
Select an item to set (hours : minutes :
seconds / number of shots).
z
Press <
0
> to display [
r
].
z
Set the desired number, then press
<
0
>. (Returns to [
s
].)
z
Interval
Can be set in a range of [00:00:01]–[99:59:59].
z
Number of shots
Can be set in a range of [01]–[99]. To keep the interval timer on
indenitely until you stop it, set [00].
188
Interval Timer
(1) (2)
4
Select [OK].
z
The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
(1) Interval
(2) Number of shots
5
Take the picture.
z
First shot is taken and shooting
continues according to the interval timer
settings.
z
During interval timer shooting, [
H
]
will blink.
z
After the set number of shots are taken,
the interval timer shooting will stop and
be automatically canceled.
z
Using a tripod is recommended.
z
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
z
Even during interval timer shooting, you can still shoot as usual by pressing
the shutter button completely. Note that the camera will prepare for the next
interval timer shot approx. 5 sec. in advance, which will temporarily prevent
operations such as adjusting shooting settings, accessing menus, and playing
back images.
z
If the next scheduled interval timer shot is not possible because the camera is
shooting or processing images, it will be skipped. For this reason, fewer shots
than specied will be taken.
z
Even during interval timer operation, auto power o is triggered after approx.
8 sec. of inactivity, as long as [Auto power o] under [
5
: Power saving] is
not set to [Disable]. The camera will automatically turn on again approx. 1 min.
before the next shot.
z
Can also be combined with AEB, white balance bracketing, and HDR mode.
z
To stop interval timer shooting, set the power switch to <
2
>.
189
Interval Timer
z
With some lenses, the focal position may change if auto power o is activated
during interval timer shooting. For details, refer to the Canon website.
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
z
Switching to AF focus mode prevents the camera from shooting unless subjects
are in focus. Consider setting the mode to manual focus and focusing manually
before shooting.
z
If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold
separately) is recommended.
z
Shooting long exposures or using shutter speeds longer than the shooting
interval will prevent shooting at the specied interval. For this reason, fewer
shots than specied will be taken. Using shutter speeds nearly the same as the
shooting interval may also reduce the number of shots.
z
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to
the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be
taken with the set intervals.
z
When using ash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than the
ash charge time. Intervals that are too short may prevent the ash from ring.
z
Intervals that are too short may prevent shooting or autofocusing.
z
Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you set the
power switch to <
2
>, set the shooting mode to <
w
/
x
>, or use EOS Utility
(EOS software).
z
During interval timer shooting, you cannot use remote control shooting (
=
223)
or remote-release shooting with a Speedlite.
190
M
Long (Bulb) Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter
button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use
bulb exposures for night scenes, reworks, the heavens, and other subjects
requiring long exposures.
1
Set the Mode dial to <a>.
2
Set the shutter speed to [BULB].
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set it.
3
Take the picture.
z
The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button pressed
completely.
z
The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the screen.
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
z
Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
z
If ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set (
=
576).
z
When shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb timer,
keep pressing the shutter button completely.
191
Long (Bulb) Exposures
z
With [
z
: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated
during long exposures (
=
171).
z
To reduce camera shake, consider using a tripod and an optional remote
controller (Remote Switch RS-60E3 or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1), or the
bulb timer.
Bulb Timer
Using the bulb timer eliminates the need to keep holding down the shutter
button during exposure.
Note that the bulb timer is only available in <
a
> mode with the shutter
speed set to [BULB].
1
Select [z: Bulb timer].
2
Select [Enable].
z
Select [Enable], then press the <
B
>
button.
192
Long (Bulb) Exposures
3
Set the desired exposure time.
z
Select the hour, minute, or second.
z
Press <
0
> to display [
r
].
z
Set the desired number, then press
<
0
>. (Returns to [
s
].)
4
Select [OK].
5
Take the picture.
z
Press the shutter button completely, and
after shooting begins, release it.
z
[
H
] and the exposure time are
displayed.
z
To stop shooting in progress, press the
shutter button completely again and
release it.
z
To cancel the timer setting, set [Disable]
in step 2.
z
If you keep pressing the shutter button completely, the bulb exposure will
continue even after the set exposure time elapses.
z
Changing shooting modes restores the bulb timer setting to [Disable].
193
M
Anti-flicker Shooting
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such
as uorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes icker and the
image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used
under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may
result. Anti-icker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and
colors are less aected by ickering.
1
Select [z: Anti-icker shoot.].
2
Select [Enable].
3
Take the picture.
z
After setting to [Enable], or when the
light source changes, detect icker
before shooting by pressing the <
Q
>
button, selecting [Anti-icker shoot.],
then pressing the <
B
> button.
z
The picture will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color tone
caused by the icker.
194
Anti-icker Shooting
z
With [Enable] set, the shutter-release time lag is longer when you shoot under
a ickering light source. Also, the continuous shooting speed may become
slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.
z
This function will not be applied to movie recording.
z
Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected. Also, if
the ickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting,
eects of the icker cannot be reduced.
z
In the <
t
>, <
d
>, or <
f
> mode, if the shutter speed changes during
continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at dierent
shutter speeds, the color tone may become inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent
color tones, use <
t
>, <
a
>, or <
s
> mode at a xed shutter speed.
z
Color tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].
z
Shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed may change when you start shooting
(even with AE lock).
z
If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the
image, icker may not be properly detected.
z
Flicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.
z
Depending on the light source, icker may not be detected properly.
z
Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected result may
not be obtained even if you use this function.
z
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
z
Flicker is not reduced in Basic Zone modes.
z
Flicker reduction also works with ash photography. However, the expected
result may not be obtained for wireless ash photography.
195
M
AF Operation
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject.
1
Select [z: AF operation].
2
Select a setting item.
z
If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the
picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.
Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see “Shooting Conditions that
Make Focusing Dicult” (
=
208).
196
AF Operation
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects (ONE SHOT)
This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter
button halfway, the camera will focus only once.
z
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
z
The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button
halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
z
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see
=
133.
z
If [
5
: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
Servo AF for Moving Subjects (SERVO)
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down
the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject
continuously.
z
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.
z
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
z
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see
=
133.
z
Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the subject’s
speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
z
Zooming during continuous shooting may throw o the focus. Zoom rst, then
recompose and shoot.
z
The beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
197
AF Operation
AF-Assist Beam
The AF-assist beam (
=
34) may re when you press the shutter button
halfway under low light or in similar conditions, to make autofocusing easier.
z
The AF-assist beam does not re when [
z
: AF operation] is set to [Servo AF].
z
When you are using a Speedlite equipped with an LED AF-assist beam,
the Speedlite res an AF-assist beam as needed.
198
AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
The camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or
Zone AF frame. In <
A
> mode, [
u
+Tracking] is set automatically.
For instructions on selecting an AF method, see
=
200.
AF Method
: Face+Tracking
The camera detects and focuses on
people’s faces. [
p
] (an AF point) appears
over any face detected, which is then
tracked.
If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.
With Servo AF, you can set the initial position for Servo AF (
=
206).
As long as the Area AF frame can track the subject during shooting,
focusing will continue.
: Spot AF
The camera focuses in a narrower area
than 1-point AF.
: 1-point AF
The camera focuses using a single AF
point [
S
].
199
AF Method
: Zone AF
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames
to cover a large area, which makes
focusing easier.
Prioritizes focusing on the nearest subject. Faces of any people in the Zone
AF frame are also given priority in focusing.
AF points in focus are displayed with [
S
].
200
AF Method
Selecting the AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you prefer to focus manually, see
=
218.
1
Select [z: AF method].
2
Select a setting item.
z
To set the AF method, you can also access the AF method screen by pressing
the <
S
> button and then the <
B
> button.
z
The descriptions on
=
201–
=
204 assume that the AF operation is set to
[One-Shot AF] (
=
196). With [Servo AF] (
=
196) set, the AF point will turn
blue when focus is achieved.
z
Regarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch operation),
see
=
184.
201
AF Method
z
u
(face)+Tracking:
c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves,
the AF point [
p
] also moves to track the face.
1
Check the AF point.
z
[
p
] (an AF point) appears over any face
detected.
z
You can choose a face with the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys when [
h
] appears after you
press the <
S
> button.
2
Focus on the subject.
z
Once you press the shutter button
halfway and the subject is in focus, the
AF point turns green and the camera
beeps.
z
An orange AF point indicates that the
camera could not focus on subjects.
3
Take the picture.
202
AF Method
Tapping a Face for Focus
Tapping a face or subject to focus on changes the AF point to [
] and
focuses where you tap.
Even if the face or subject moves on the screen, the AF point [ ] moves to
track it.
z
If the subject’s face is signicantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (
=
218) so that the face can be detected,
then perform AF.
z
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
z
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture,
too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
z
AF cannot detect subjects or people’s faces at the edges of the screen.
Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to
the center.
z
The [
p
] may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.
z
The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
203
AF Method
z
Spot AF/1-point AF/Zone AF
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF
screens are used as an example.
(1)
1
Check the AF point.
z
The AF point (1) will appear.
With Zone AF, the Zone AF frame is
displayed.
2
Move the AF point.
z
Press the <
S
> button.
z
Use the <
V
> cross keys to move the
AF point to where you want to focus (but
note that with some lenses, it may not
move to the edge of the screen).
z
You can also tap the screen to move the
AF point.
z
To center the AF point or Zone AF frame,
press the <
B
> button.
z
For magnied display, turn the <
5
>
dial. Each turn of the <
5
> dial changes
the magnication ratio.
204
AF Method
3
Focus on the subject.
z
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will
turn orange.
4
Take the picture.
z
AF points may not track subjects under some shooting conditions when
Servo AF is used with Zone AF.
z
Focusing with an AF-assist beam may be dicult when using a peripheral AF
point. In this case, select an AF point in the center.
z
With [
8
: C.Fn II-2: Orientation linked AF point], you can set separate AF
points for vertical and horizontal shooting (
=
532).
205
AF Method
Magnied View
You can check the focus by tapping [
u
] to magnify display by approx. 5×
or 10×. Magnied view is not possible with [
u
+Tracking].
z
Magnication is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF] or [1-point AF]
and on the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF].
z
Autofocusing is performed with magnied display if you press the shutter
button halfway when set to [1-point AF], and [Spot AF]. When set to
[Zone AF], autofocusing is performed after restoring normal display.
z
With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the magnied
view, the camera will return to the normal view for focusing.
z
If focusing is dicult in the magnied view, return to the normal view and
perform AF.
z
If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnied view, accurate
focus may not be achieved.
z
AF speed diers between the normal view and magnied view.
z
Continuous AF and Movie Servo AF are not available when display is magnied.
z
With the magnied view, achieving focus becomes more dicult due to camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
206
AF Method
Setting the Initial Servo AF Position
1. Set [
8
: C.Fn II-3: Initial Servo AF pt for
c
] to an option other than
[Auto].
2. An Area AF frame (1) and AF point (2) are displayed.
(2)
(1)
3. To move the AF point into position for focusing, press the <
S
> button,
then use the <
6
> <
5
> dials or <
V
> cross keys. Pressing the
<
B
> button will return the AF point to the screen center. You can also
tap the screen to move the AF point.
4. Pressing the <
0
> button after you press the <
S
> button to move the
AF point will set the current position as the starting position for Servo AF.
207
AF Method
AF Shooting Tips
z
Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will
focus again.
z
Image brightness may change during autofocusing.
z
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to
focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
z
If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may icker, and
focusing may be dicult. In this case, restart the camera and resume
shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
z
If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually (
=
218).
z
For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus,
try centering the subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them
into focus, then recompose the shot before shooting.
z
With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with
autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.
208
AF Method
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Dicult
z
Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color at surfaces or
when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
z
Subjects in low light.
z
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal
direction.
z
Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
z
Fine lines and subject outlines.
z
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.
z
Night scenes or points of light.
z
The image ickers under uorescent or LED lighting.
z
Extremely small subjects.
z
Subjects at the edge of the screen.
z
Strongly backlit or reective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reective body, etc.).
z
Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a
cage, etc.).
z
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to
camera shake or subject blur.
z
Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
z
Soft focus eect is applied with a soft focus lens.
z
A special eect lter is used.
z
Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
AF Range
The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens used and
aspect ratio and whether you are using features such as Movie digital IS.
209
Eye Detection AF
With the AF method set to [
u
+Tracking], the camera can focus on people’s
eyes.
1
Select [z: Eye Detection AF].
2
Select [Enable].
3
Aim the camera at the subject.
z
An AF point is displayed around their eye.
z
You can tap the screen to select an eye
for focus.
z
The entire face is selected when you tap
other facial features, such as their nose
or mouth. Eyes to focus on are selected
automatically.
z
Depending on the [Eye Detection AF]
setting, you can choose an eye or face
for focus with the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys when
[
h
] appears after you press the <
S
>
button.
4
Take the picture.
210
Eye Detection AF
z
Subject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and
shooting conditions.
z
To disable Eye Detection AF without using menu operations, press these
buttons, one after another: <
S
>, <
B
>, and <
B
>. To resume Eye
Detection AF, press the <
B
> button again.
211
Continuous AF
This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to
focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Select [z: Continuous AF].
2
Select [Enable].
z
Enabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because the lens
is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.
212
Touch & Drag AF
AF points or Zone AF frames can be moved by tapping or dragging the
screen as you look through an optional electronic viewnder.
Enabling Touch & Drag AF
1
Select [z: Touch & drag AF
settings].
2
Select [Touch & drag AF].
z
Select [Enable].
Positioning Method
You can set how positions are specied by touching or dragging.
1
Set the positioning method.
z
[Absolute]
The AF point moves to the touched or dragged position on the screen.
z
[Relative]
The AF point moves in the direction you drag, by an amount
corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter where you touch the
screen.
213
Touch & Drag AF
Active Touch Area
You can specify the area of the screen used for touch and drag operations.
1
Set the active touch area.
z
Touching the screen when [
u
+Tracking] is set displays a round orange frame
[
]. After you lift your nger at the position to move the AF point to, [ ] is
displayed and that subject is tracked. To cancel subject selection, press the
<
S
> button.
214
M
Manually Focusing with a Lens after AF
For EF-M, EF, or EF-S lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing,
you can specify how manual focus adjustment is used with One-Shot AF.
1
Select [z: Lens electronic MF].
2
Select an item.
z
[
] Disable after One-Shot AF
Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.
z
[ ] Enable after One-Shot AF
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep
holding down the shutter button halfway.
z
For details on your lens’s manual focus specications, refer to the lens
instruction manual.
215
AF-Assist Beam Firing
You can use the AF-assist beam of the camera or a Speedlite.
1
Select [z: AF-assist beam ring].
2
Select an item.
z
[ON] Enable
Enables ring of the AF-assist beam of the camera or a Speedlite
equipped with an LED AF-assist beam, when needed.
z
[OFF] Disable
Disables ring of the AF-assist beam.
216
Image Stabilization
You can adjust the Image Stabilizer (IS) setting of lenses equipped with
optical image stabilization. For details on [
k
Digital IS], see
=
268.
1
Select [z: IS settings].
2
Select [IS mode].
3
Set an option.
z
[O]
Deactivates image stabilization.
z
[On]
Camera shake will be corrected.
z
If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on
a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. Additionally, you should set
[IS mode] to [O] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera.
217
M
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)
You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure
separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure
setting. Press the <
A
> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and
take the picture. It is eective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.
1
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
2
Press the <A> button (4).
z
A [
A
] icon is displayed in the lower left
of the screen to indicate that exposure is
locked (AE lock).
z
Each time you press the <
A
> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
3
Recompose and take the picture.
z
When you are to take more pictures
while maintaining the AE lock, keep
holding down the <
A
> button and
press the shutter button to take another
picture.
AE Lock Eects
Metering
mode
AF Point Selection Method
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
q
Exposure centered on the AF point
in focus is locked.
Exposure centered on the selected
AF point is locked.
wre
Exposure at the center of the screen is locked.
* For manual focus when set to [
q
], exposure at the center of the screen is locked.
218
Manual Focus
If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and
focus manually.
1
Set the focus mode switch to <MF>.
z
Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
2
Determine an area to magnify.
z
Press the <
S
> button to activate
magnied display, then move it to where
you want to focus by using the <
6
>
dial or the <
V
> cross keys.
z
To center the magnied area, press the
<
B
> button.
(1) (2) (3)
3
Magnify the image.
z
Each turn of the <
5
> dial changes the
screen, as follows.
1× ↔ 5× ↔ 10×
(1) AE lock
(2) Magnied area position
(3) Magnication (approx.)
219
Manual Focus
4
Focus manually.
z
While looking at the magnied image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
z
After focusing, press <
0
> to return to
the normal view.
5
Take the picture.
z
When using non EF-M lenses, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> in
step 1.
z
When [AF] is displayed in step 1 during movie recording with an EF-M lens,
you can tap the icon to change it to an [MF] icon. No operating noises are
made, so you can switch to manual focus without these sounds being recorded
in the movie.
z
Even with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a picture.
220
MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)
Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color as you focus manually
to make it easier to focus. You can set the outline color and adjust the
sensitivity (level) of edge detection (except in <
A
> mode).
1
Select [z: MF peaking settings].
2
Select [Peaking].
z
Select [On].
3
Set the level and color.
z
Set it as necessary.
z
Peaking display is not shown during magnied display.
z
MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO
expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [O].
z
Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
221
Focus Mode Switching
By disabling the focus mode switch of EF-M lenses, you can enable menu-
based focus mode switching.
1
Select [5: switch (AF/MF)].
2
Select [Disable].
z
The [
z
: Focus mode] menu setting
now applies instead of the focus mode
switch, which is deactivated.
3
Select [z: Focus mode].
4
Select a setting item.
z
[AF]: Autofocus
z
[MF]: Manual focus
Note that in some Basic Zone modes,
autofocus is used regardless of this
setting.
222
Type of Digest Movie
Both still photos and clips are captured when you shoot in <
D
> mode,
but you can specify whether to include the still photos in the resulting
digest movie.
1
Enter <D> mode.
2
Select [z: Digest type].
3
Set an option.
z
[Include stills]
Digest movies include still photos.
z
[No stills]
Digest movies do not include still photos.
223
Remote Control Shooting
Remote control shooting is supported with Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
or Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Bluetooth and wired connections, respectively;
sold separately).
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the
camera.
After pairing the camera and BR-E1 (
=
446), set the drive mode to [
Q
]
or [
k
] (
=
135).
For operation procedures, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.
z
If remote control shooting is enabled, the auto power o will take eect in
approx. 2 min.
z
The remote control can also be used for movie recording (
=
276).
Remote Switch RS-60E3
Once connected to the camera, the switch enables you to shoot remotely
over a wired connection.
For operation procedures, refer to the RS-60E3 instruction manual.
1
Open the terminal cover.
2
Connect the plug to the remote
control terminal.
224
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
Image Quality
z
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding)
may become noticeable.
z
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
z
Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause the camera’s internal
temperature to rise and aect image quality. When you are not shooting,
always turn o the camera.
z
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is high,
image quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before
shooting again.
White [
s
] and Red [
E
] Internal Temperature Warning Icons
z
If the camera’s internal temperature rises from extended shooting or use in hot
environments, a white [
s
] or red [
E
] icon will appear.
z
The white [
s
] icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline.
Stop shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
z
The red [
E
] icon indicates that shooting will soon end automatically. Shooting
will not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so stop
shooting temporarily or turn o the camera and let it cool down a while.
z
Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white [
s
]
or red [
E
] icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn o
the camera.
z
If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with a
high ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white [
s
] icon
is displayed.
Shooting Results
z
In magnied view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in red. If you
take the picture in magnied view, the exposure may not come out as desired.
Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
z
Even if you take the picture in magnied view, the image will be captured with
the image area of the normal view.
225
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Images and Display
z
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reect the
brightness of the captured image.
z
Under low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low ISO
speeds, but there will be less noise in your shots, because image quality varies
between display and captured images.
z
The screen or exposure value may icker if the light source (lighting) changes.
In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you
will use.
z
Pointing the camera at dierent direction may momentarily prevent correct
display of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.
z
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show
the bright area.
z
In low light, if you set the [
5
: Disp. brightness] to a bright setting, noise or
irregular colors may appear in the image. However, the noise or irregular colors
will not be recorded in the captured image.
z
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced
than in the actual image.
Lens
z
Image Stabilizer is active all times, even without the shutter button pressed
halfway, when you use an EF-M lens with [IS mode] in [
z
: IS settings] set to
[On], or an EF or EF-S lens with the lens image stabilizer switch set to <
1
>.
The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number
of possible shots depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image
Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is recommended that
you set the IS switch to <
2
>.
z
With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
z
With an optional HDMI cable (camera end: Type D), you can display images on
a television (
=
321). Note that no sound will be output.
226
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Information Display
For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see
=
583.
z
When [
g
] is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is displayed at the
brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.
z
If [
g
] is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness that
diers from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions.
However, the actual image recorded will reect the exposure setting. Note that
the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.
z
Exposure simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings.
The [
g
] icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be
displayed on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be
properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
z
The histogram can be displayed when [
z
: Expo. simulation] is set to [Enable]
(
=
154).
227227
Movie Recording
For movie recording, set the Mode dial to <
k
>.
z
You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo
shooting.
z
You can also specify movie recording mode from [
z
: Shooting mode] after
setting the Mode dial to <
k
>.
228
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
z
Shooting 1
=
232
=
241
=
248
=
128
=
250
=
223
=
261
z
Shooting 2
=
140
=
277
=
149
=
150
=
153
z
Shooting 3
=
155
=
158
=
160
=
163
=
172
229
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
z
Shooting 4
=
198
=
209
=
212
=
214
z
Shooting 5
=
220
=
270
=
221
=
278
=
216
z
Shooting 6
=
271
=
279
=
273
=
274
230
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
In [
u
] mode, the following screens are displayed.
z
Shooting 1
=
239
=
223
=
248
=
261
z
Shooting 2
=
198
=
209
=
212
z
Shooting 3
=
220
=
216
=
221
231
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
z
Shooting 4
=
271
232
Movie Mode
Recording with [Movie auto exposure]
Autoexposure control will take eect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
1
Set the Mode dial to <k>.
2
Press <0>.
3
Select [k].
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select
[
k
(Movie auto exposure)],
then press <
0
>.
4
Focus on the subject.
z
Before recording a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (
=
200–
=
208,
=
218).
z
By default, [
z
: Movie Servo AF] is set
to [Enable] so that the camera always
keeps focusing (
=
271).
z
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with the
current AF method.
233
Movie Mode
(
2
)
(1)
5
Record the movie.
z
Press the movie shooting button to start
recording a movie.
z
While the movie is being recorded, the
[
o
REC] mark (1) will be displayed on
the upper right of the screen.
z
Sound is recorded by the microphones
at the positions indicated (2).
z
To stop recording the movie, press the
movie shooting button again.
z
The Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [
5
: Mode guide] is set to
[Disable]. Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [
k
].
z
You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <
A
> button.
After applying AE lock during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing
the <
S
> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <
S
> button.)
z
Exposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops.
z
ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value are not recorded in movie Exif
information.
z
The camera is compatible with Speedlite functionality to activate the LED
light automatically under low light when recording movies with auto exposure.
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the Speedlite equipped with an
LED light.
ISO Speed in [Movies] Mode
ISO speed is set automatically. For details on the ISO speed,
see
=
277,
=
581.
234
Movie Mode
Recording with [Movie manual exp.]
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie
recording.
1
Set the Mode dial to <k>.
2
Press <0>.
3
Select [M].
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select
[
M
(Movie manual exp.)], then press
<
0
>.
4
Set the ISO speed.
z
Press the <
B
> button.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to set it.
235
Movie Mode
(1)
(2)
5
Set the shutter speed (1) and
aperture value (2).
z
To set the shutter speed, turn the <
6
>
dial. To set the aperture value, turn the
<
5
> dial.
z
Shutter speed can be set in a range of
1/4000–1/8 sec.
6
Focus and record the movie.
z
The procedure is the same as steps 4
and 5 for “Recording with [Movie auto
exposure]” (
=
232).
z
The Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [
5
: Mode guide] is set to
[Disable]. Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [
M
].
236
Movie Mode
z
When switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera
settings again before recording movies.
z
During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture.
Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high
ISO speeds.
z
When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.
1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed,
the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.
z
If you change the shutter speed while recording under uorescent or LED
lighting, image icker may be recorded.
z
With ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set in a range of ±3 stops.
z
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <
A
> button to lock the ISO speed.
After locking the ISO speed during movie recording, you can cancel it by
pressing the <
S
> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained until you press the
<
S
> button.)
z
If you press the <
A
> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level dierence on the exposure level indicator compared to when the
<
A
> button was pressed.
z
With the camera ready to shoot in the [
M
] mode, you can display the
histogram by pressing the <
B
> button.
ISO Speed for [Movie manual exp.]
You can set the ISO speed manually or select [AUTO] to set it automatically.
For details on the ISO speed, see
=
277,
=
581.
Still Photo Shooting
Still photos cannot be taken in movie recording mode. To shoot still
photos, turn the Mode dial to switch to another shooting mode.
Information Display (Movie Recording)
For details on the icons displayed for movie recording, see
=
585.
237
Movie Mode
Cautions for Movie Recording
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
z
If you shoot something that has ne detail, moire or false colors may result.
z
If [
Q
] or [
Q
w] is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
recording, the white balance may also change.
z
If you record a movie under uorescent or LED lighting, the movie image
may icker.
z
If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light,
horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise
may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an electronic
focusing ring.
z
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming
during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure
changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of focus.
z
Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
z
During movie recording, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:
The focus is temporarily greatly thrown o, changes in movie brightness is
recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical sound of
the lens is recorded.
z
Avoid covering the built-in microphones (
=
233) with your ngers or other
objects.
z
“General Movie Recording Cautions” are on
=
280–
=
281.
z
If necessary, also read “General Still Photo Shooting Cautions” on
=
224–
=
226.
238
Movie Mode
Notes for Movie Recording
z
Each time you record a movie, a new movie le is created on the card.
z
The movie’s eld of view coverage for recording 4K, Full HD, and HD movies is
approx. 100%.
z
You can also focus by pressing the AF start button.
z
To enable starting or stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button
completely, set [Fully-press] for [
5
: Shutter btn function for movies] to
[Start/stop mov rec].
z
Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (
=
233).
z
Any external microphones such as Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1
(sold separately) connected to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal
are used instead of the built-in microphones (
=
249).
z
Most external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug can
be used.
z
With EF lenses, focus preset during movie recording is available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
z
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K, Full HD, and HD movies.
239
HDR Movie Mode
You can shoot high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of
high-contrast scenes.
1
Set the Mode dial to <k>.
2
Press <0>.
3
Select [u].
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select
[
u
(HDR Movie)], then press <
0
>.
4
Record an HDR movie.
z
Record the movie in the same way as
normal movie recording.
z
For details on le sizes and the
recording time available, see the table
on
=
580.
240
HDR Movie Mode
z
Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts of the
movie may look distorted. During handheld recording, camera shake may make
the distortion look more noticeable. Using a tripod is recommended. Note that
even if a tripod is used for recording, afterimages or noise may become more
noticeable when the HDR movie is played back frame-by-frame or in slow-
motion compared to normal playback.
z
Image color and brightness may change signicantly for a moment if you
change settings for HDR movie recording. Also, the movie will not be updated
for a moment, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when
recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
z
The recording size is
L6X
(NTSC) or
L5X
(PAL).
z
ISO speed is set automatically when you record HDR movies.
241
Movie Recording Quality
On the [
z
: Movie rec quality] tab, select
[Movie rec. size] to set the image size,
frame rate, and compression method.
The movie will be recorded as an MP4 le.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [
5
: Video system]
setting (
=
502).
z
The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies
(card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie recording
size. Before recording movies, see
=
579 to check the performance
requirements of the card.
Image Size
z
[
H
] 3840×2160
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
Not available unless the Mode dial is set to <
k
>.
z
[
L
] 1920×1080
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Denition (Full HD) quality.
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
z
[
w
] 1280×720
The movie is recorded in High-Denition (HD) quality. The aspect ratio
is 16:9.
z
If you change the [
5
: Video system] setting, also set [Movie rec. size] under
[
z
: Movie rec quality] again.
z
Normal playback of 4K and
L8
/
7
movies may not be possible on other
devices, because playback is processing-intensive.
z
Clarity and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording size and the
lens used.
z
Movies cannot be recorded in VGA quality.
242
Movie Recording Quality
4K Movie Recording
z
Recording 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details,
see “Cards that Can Record Movies” (
=
579).
z
Recording 4K movies greatly increases the processing load, which may
cause the camera’s internal temperature to increase faster or become
higher than for regular movies. If a red [
E
] icon or [
F
] appears during
movie recording, the card may be hot, so stop recording the movie
and let the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do not
remove the card immediately.)
z
From a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save as an approx.
8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still image to the card (
=
315).
243
Movie Recording Quality
Frame Rate (fps: frame per second)
z
[
2
] 119.88fps/[
8
] 59.94fps/[
6
] 29.97fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
z
[
3
] 100.00fps/[
7
] 50.00fps/[
5
] 25.00fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
Compression Method
z
[
X
] IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time eciently for recording.
z
[
W
] ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Uses ALL-I compression for time-lapse movie recording (
=
250).
Compresses each frame, one at a time, for recording. Although le sizes
are larger than with IPB (Standard), movies are more suitable for editing.
z
[ ] IPB (Light)
Since the movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard),
the le size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard) and the playback
compatibility will be higher. This will make the possible recording time
longer than with IPB (Standard) (with a card having the same capacity).
Movie Recording Format
z
[
C
] MP4
All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie les in MP4
format (le extension “.MP4”).
244
Movie Recording Quality
Cards that Can Record Movies
For details on cards you can use for various movie recording sizes,
see
=
579.
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with a writing/reading
speed (as specied in card performance requirements) shown in the
table on
=
579 or higher than the standard specication. Test cards by
recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your
specied size (
=
241).
z
Format cards before recording 4K movies (
=
490).
z
If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be
recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading
speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
z
When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
suciently higher than the bit rate.
z
When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try again.
If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website, etc.
z
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended (
=
490).
z
To check the card’s writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
website, etc.
245
Movie Recording Quality
High Frame Rate
You can record Full HD movies at a high frame rate of 119.88 fps or
100.00 fps by setting [High Frame Rate] under [
z
: Movie rec quality] to
[Enable]. This is ideal for recording movies that will be played back in slow
motion. The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec.
Movies are recorded as
L
2
X
or
L
3
X
. They are recorded cropped
around the center of the shooting screen.
Movie Servo AF and Movie digital IS have
no eect when recording High Frame Rate
movies. AF is not used to focus.
(1) Full HD recording
(2) High Frame Rate recording
Recording coverage
(1) (2)
Because High Frame Rate movies are recorded as 29.97 fps/25.00 fps
movie les, they are played back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
z
Check the [Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable].
z
The screen may icker if you record High Frame Rate movies under uorescent
or LED lighting.
z
For a moment when you start or stop recording High Frame Rate movies, the
movie is not updated, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when
recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
z
Movie frame rates shown on the screen as you record High Frame Rate movies
do not correspond to the frame rate of the movie recorded.
z
Sound is not recorded.
246
Movie Recording Quality
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you record a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep recording without
interruption.
z
Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will
format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the le size
exceeds 4 GB, a new movie le will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie
le individually. Movie les cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie
and play it back.
z
Using SDXC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will format it
in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the le size exceeds 4 GB
during movie recording, the movie will be saved as a single le (rather
than being split into multiple les).
z
When importing movie les exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS
Utility or a card reader (
=
553). It may not be possible to save movie les
exceeding 4 GB if you attempt this using standard features of the computer’s
operating system.
247
Movie Recording Quality
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
For details on le sizes and the recording time available at each movie
recording size, see
=
580.
Movie Recording Time Limit
z
When recording non-High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min.
59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the
movie as a new le).
z
When recording High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. Once 7 min.
29 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a High Frame Rate movie again by pressing the movie shooting button
(which records the movie as a new le).
248
Sound Recording
You can record movies while recording
sound with the built-in stereo microphone
or an external stereo microphone. You can
also freely adjust the sound-recording level.
Use [
z
: Sound recording] to set sound
recording functions.
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
z
Auto
The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control
will take eect automatically in response to the sound level.
z
Manual
You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed.
Select [Rec. level] and press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys while looking at the
level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at the peak hold
indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up on the
right of the [12] (–12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds [0],
the sound will be distorted.
z
Disable
Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter
Set to [Auto] to reduce wind noise automatically when there is wind
outdoors. Only activated when the camera’s built-in microphone is used.
When the wind lter function takes eect, part of the low bass sounds will
also be reduced.
249
Sound Recording
Attenuator
Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if
[Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for recording, sound distortion
may still result if there is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to [Enable]
is recommended.
External Microphone
Normally, the camera’s built-in microphone records in stereo.
If an external microphone equipped with a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm
diameter) is connected to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal, the
external microphone will be given the priority. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended.
z
Sounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external
microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication
function is not recommended.
z
When connecting an external microphone to the camera, be sure to insert the
plug all the way in.
z
The camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound and
mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Using Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) may reduce such sounds in the movie.
z
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera’s
external microphone IN terminal.
z
In Basic Zone or [
u
] modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] are
[On] or [O]. Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the recording level.
z
Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI,
except when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable].
z
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.
z
Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
250
Time-lapse Movies
Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to
create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how
a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time
it took. It is eective for a xed-point observation of changing scenery,
growing plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies will be recorded in MP4 format at the following
quality:
H
6W
(NTSC)/
H
5W
(PAL) for 4K shooting, and
L 6 W
(NTSC)/
L 5 W
(PAL) for Full HD shooting.
Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the
[
5
: Video system] setting (
=
502).
1
Select a shooting mode.
z
Select [
k
] (
=
232) or [
M
] (
=
234).
2
Select [z: Time-lapse movie].
3
Select [Time-lapse].
4
Select a scene.
z
Select a scene to suit the shooting
situation.
z
For greater freedom when setting the
shooting interval and number of shots
manually, select [Custom].
251
Time-lapse Movies
(1) (2)
5
Set the shooting interval.
z
Select [Interval/shots].
z
Select [Interval] (sec.). Use the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys to set a value, then press
<
0
>.
z
Refer to [
k
: Time required] (1) and
[
3
: Playback time] (2) to set the
number.
When [Custom] is set
z
Select [Interval] (min.:sec.). (An interval
of once per second is not available.)
z
Press <
0
> to display [
r
].
z
Set the desired number, then press
<
0
>. (Returns to [
s
].)
z
Select [OK] to register the setting.
6
Set the number of shots.
z
Select [No. of shots]. Use the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys to set a value, then press
<
0
>.
z
Refer to the [
k
: Time required] and
[
3
: Playback time] to set the number.
When [Custom] is set
z
Select the digit.
z
Press <
0
> to display [
r
].
z
Set the desired number, then press
<
0
>. (Returns to [
s
].)
z
Check that [
3
: Playback time] is not
displayed in red.
z
Select [OK] to register the setting.
252
Time-lapse Movies
z
With [Scene**], available intervals and numbers of shots are restricted, to suit
the type of scene.
z
The
H
6
/
H
5
bit rate is approx. 300 Mbps, and the
L6
/
L5
bit
rate, approx. 90 Mbps. Use a card with a suciently fast read speed.
z
If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx.
2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.
7
Select the desired movie recording
size.
z
H
(3840×2160)
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame
rate is 29.97 fps (
6
) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (
5
) for PAL, and
movies are recorded in MP4 (
C
) format with ALL-I (
W
) compression.
z
L
(1920×1080)
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Denition (Full HD) quality.
The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (
6
) for NTSC and
25.00 fps (
5
) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (
C
) format
with ALL-I (
W
) compression.
253
Time-lapse Movies
8
Congure [Auto exposure].
z
Fixed 1st frame
When taking the rst shot, metering is performed to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the rst
shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings
for the rst shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
z
Each frame
Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. Note that if functions such as
Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto], they will be set
automatically for each subsequent shot.
9
Congure [Screen auto o].
z
Disable
Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed.
(The screen turns o only at the time of shooting.) Note that the screen
will turn o when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting started.
z
Enable
Note that the screen will turn o when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the
shooting started.
z
During time-lapse movie recording, you can press the <
B
> button to turn
on/o the screen.
254
Time-lapse Movies
10
Set the beeper.
z
Select [Beep as img taken].
z
If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not
sound for shooting.
(1) (2)
11
Check the settings.
(1) Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
(2) Playback time
Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the
movie) when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD
movie from the still photos taken with the set intervals.
12
Close the menu.
z
Press the <
M
> button to turn o the
menu screen.
255
Time-lapse Movies
13
Read the message.
z
Read the message and select [OK].
14
Take test shots.
z
As with still photo shooting, set the
exposure and shooting functions, then
press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
z
Press the shutter button completely to
take test shots. The still photos will be
recorded to the card.
z
If there are no problems with the test
shots, go to the next step.
z
To take test shots again, repeat this
step.
z
Test shots are captured in JPEG
73
quality.
z
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in [
k
] mode or in [
M
] mode with
ISO Auto, in [
a
Max for Auto] under [
z
:
k
ISO speed settings] (
=
277).
z
If you have set [Half-press] under [
5
: Shutter btn function for movies] to
[Meter.+
k
Servo AF], it is automatically changed to [Meter.+One-Shot AF]
when you set up time-lapse movie recording.
256
Time-lapse Movies
15
Press the movie shooting button.
z
The camera will be ready to start
recording a time-lapse movie.
z
To return to step 14, press the movie
shooting button again.
(1) (2)
16
Record the time-lapse movie.
z
Press the <
B
> button and check
again the “Time required (1)” and
“Interval (2)” displayed on the screen.
z
Press the shutter button completely
to start recording the time-lapse
movie.
z
AF will not work during time-lapse movie
recording.
z
While the time-lapse movie is recorded,
[
o
REC] is displayed.
z
When the set number of shots are taken,
the time-lapse movie recording ends.
z
To cancel recording time-lapse
movies, set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].
257
Time-lapse Movies
z
If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of shots,
[Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can continue
shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
z
If the movie le size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings and the
card is not formatted in exFAT (
=
491), [Playback time] will be displayed in
red. If you keep shooting in this condition and the movie le size reaches 4 GB,
the time-lapse movie recording will stop.
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
z
Time-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a
computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected.
z
Movie Servo AF will not function.
z
If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may not
be displayed properly (may dier from that of the resulting movie).
z
Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens
may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens
aberration correction not to function properly.
z
When recording a time-lapse movie under a ickering light, noticeable image
ickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be recorded.
z
Images that are displayed while time-lapse movies are being recorded may
look dierent from the resulting movie. (For example, there may be inconsistent
brightness from ickering light sources, or noise from a high ISO speed.)
z
When recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed during
shooting may look dierent from what is actually recorded in the movie. In such
cases, the [
g
] icon will blink.
z
If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject
during time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.
z
During time-lapse movie recording, auto power o will not take eect. Also,
you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back
images, etc.
z
Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
z
With time-lapse movie recording, you can press the shutter button completely
to start or stop the movie recording regardless of the [
5
: Shutter btn function
for movies] setting.
z
With [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame],
if the brightness diers greatly from the preceding shot, the camera may not
shoot at the set interval.
258
Time-lapse Movies
z
If the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long exposures),
or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may not be able to
shoot at the set interval. Shooting may also be prevented by shooting intervals
nearly the same as the shutter speed.
z
If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten
the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
z
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to
the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be
taken with the set intervals.
z
Even if [Screen auto o] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn o during the
exposure. Also note that images may not be displayed if the interval between
shots is too brief.
z
The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the
time-lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as a
movie le.
z
If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use EOS
Utility (EOS software), set [
z
: Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If an option
other than [Disable] is selected, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer.
z
During time-lapse movie recording, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not operate.
z
Time-lapse movie recording ends and the setting changes to [Disable] if you
set the power switch to <
2
>, or if auto power o is activated.
z
Even if a ash is used, it will not re.
z
The following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and
switch the setting to [Disable].
y
Selecting either [Clean now
f
] under [
5
: Sensor cleaning] or selecting
[Basic settings] under [
5
: Reset camera].
y
Turning the Mode dial.
z
If you start time-lapse movie recording while the white [
s
] (
=
224) is
displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate. It is
recommended that you start time-lapse movie recording after the white [
s
]
disappears (camera’s internal temperature decreases).
z
With [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter speed, and
aperture value may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in
some modes.
259
Time-lapse Movies
z
Using a tripod is recommended.
z
Taking test shots as in step 14 and recording test movies for time-lapse movies
beforehand is recommended.
z
The movie’s eld of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse
movie recording is approx. 100%.
z
To cancel the time-lapse movie recording in progress, either press the shutter
button completely or press the movie shooting button. The time-lapse movie
shot so far will be recorded on the card.
z
If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than
48 hours, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the
number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
z
Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie le will
still be created. For [Playback time], “00'00"” will be displayed.
z
If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories
(sold separately) is recommended.
z
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies.
260
Time-lapse Movies
z
You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and stop
the time-lapse movie recording.
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
y
First, pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (
=
446).
y
Make sure [
z
: Remote control] is set to [Enable].
y
Take test shots, then when the camera is ready to shoot (as in step 15 on
=
256), set the BR-E1’s release timing/movie shooting switch to <
o
>
(immediate release) or <2> (release after 2-sec. delay).
y
If the remote control’s switch has been set to <
k
>, the time-lapse movie
recording cannot start.
Camera status/
remote control setting
<
o
> Immediate release
<2> 2-sec. delay
<
k
> Movie recording
Test-shooting screen Test-shooting To shooting-ready
Shooting-ready Starts shooting To test-shooting screen
During time-lapse
movie recording
Ends recording Ends recording
261
Video Snapshots
Record a series of short video snapshots, each a few seconds long, and
the camera will combine them to create a video snapshot album that shows
these highlights of your trip or event.
Video snapshots are available when the movie recording size is set to
L6X
(NTSC) /
L5X
(PAL).
Video snapshot albums can also be played back with background music
(
=
353).
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot **
Video snapshot album
1
Select a shooting mode.
z
Select [
k
] (
=
232
) or [
M
] (
=
234
).
2
Select [z: Video snapshot].
3
Select [Enable].
262
Video Snapshots
4
Select [Album settings].
5
Select [Create a new album].
z
Read the message and select [OK].
6
Specify the playback time.
z
Specify playback time per video
snapshot.
7
Specify the playback eect.
z
This setting determines how fast albums
are played back.
(1)
8
Check the required recording time.
z
The time required to record each video
snapshot is indicated (1), based on the
playback time and eect.
263
Video Snapshots
(2)
9
Close the menu.
z
Press the <
M
> button to close the
menu.
z
A blue bar is displayed to indicate the
recording time (2).
10
Record the rst video snapshot.
z
Press the movie shooting button to start
recording.
z
The blue bar indicating recording time
gradually decreases, and after the
specied time elapses, recording stops
automatically.
z
A conrmation message is displayed
(
=
264).
11
Save as a video snapshot album.
z
Select [
J
Save as album].
z
The clip is saved as the rst video
snapshot in the album.
12
Record your next video snapshots.
z
Repeat step 10 to record the next video
snapshot.
z
Select [
J
Add to album].
z
To create another album, select
[
W
Save as a new album].
z
Repeat step 12 as needed.
264
Video Snapshots
13
Stop recording video snapshots.
z
Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie recording,
be sure to specify [Disable].
z
Press the <
M
> button to close
the menu and return to normal movie
recording.
Options in Steps 11 and 12
Function Description
J
Save as album (Step 11)
Saves the clip as the rst video snapshot in an
album.
J
Add to album (Step 12)
Adds the current video snapshot to the album
recorded most recently.
W
Save as a new album (Step 12)
Creates a new album and saves the clip as the
rst video snapshot. This album le is dierent
from the one recorded most recently.
1
Playback video snapshot
(Steps 11, 12)
Plays the video snapshot just recorded.
r
Do not save to album (Step 11)
r
Delete without saving to album
(Step 12)
Deletes the recently recorded video snapshot
without saving it to an album. Select [OK] on the
conrmation dialog.
z
If you prefer to record the next video snapshot immediately, set [Show conrm
msg] under [
z
: Video snapshot] to [Disable]. This setting enables you to
record the next video snapshot immediately, without a conrmation message.
265
Video Snapshots
Adding to an Existing Album
1
Select [Add to existing album].
z
Follow step 5 on
=
262 to select
[Add to existing album].
2
Select an existing album.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
existing album, then press <
0
>.
z
Select [OK].
z
Some video snapshot settings will be
updated to match settings of the existing
album.
3
Close the menu.
z
Press the <
M
> button to close the
menu.
z
The video snapshot recording screen is
displayed.
4
Record a video snapshot.
z
Record the video snapshot as described
in step 10 of “Video Snapshots”
(
=
261).
z
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
General Video Snapshot Precautions
z
No sound is recorded when you set [Playback eect] to [1/2x speed] or
[2x speed].
z
Recording time per video snapshot is only approximate. It may dier slightly
from the actual recording time indicated during playback, due to the frame rate
and other factors.
266
Miniature Effect Movie
By blurring image areas outside a selected area, you can record movies
with a miniature model eect applied.
1
Select a shooting mode.
z
Select [
k
] (
=
232) or [
M
] (
=
234).
2
Select [c].
z
Press <
0
>, and on the Quick Control
screen, select [
c
] in [
].
3
Move the scene frame.
z
To make the scene frame movable
(displayed in orange), press the <
S
>
button or tap [
r
] in the lower right of the
screen.
z
By tapping [
T
], you can also switch
between vertical and horizontal scene
frame orientation.
z
Switching scene frame orientation is
possible with the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys when
in horizontal orientation and <
W
> <
X
>
keys when in vertical orientation.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> or <
Y
> <
Z
> keys
to move the scene frame. To center the
scene frame again, press the <
B
>
button.
z
Press <
0
> to conrm the position of
the scene frame.
267
Miniature Eect Movie
4
Move the AF point.
z
Use the <
V
> cross keys to move the
AF point to the position to focus on, then
press <
0
>.
5
Record the movie.
Estimated playback speed and time for a movie recorded for
one minute
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
z
Sound is not recorded.
z
Speed can be changed by pressing the <
B
> button in step 2.
z
To make people and objects in the scene move quickly during playback, select
[
], [ ], or [ ] before recording the movie. The scene will resemble a
miniature model.
268
Movie Digital IS
In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake during
movie recording. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With Movie
digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens without Image
Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical Image Stabilizer, set the
lens’s Image Stabilizer switch to <
1
>.
1
Select [z: IS settings].
2
Select [k Digital IS].
3
Select a setting item.
z
Disable (
v
)
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
z
Enable (
w
)
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnied.
z
Enhanced (
x
) (Not displayed for still photos shooting.)
Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger camera shake can be
corrected. The image will be more magnied.
269
Movie Digital IS
Combination IS
Even more eective correction is possible by recording movies with Movie
digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will combine optical
and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera.
z
Movie digital IS will not function when the lens’s optical Image Stabilizer switch
is set to <
2
>.
z
With a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS will not
function.
z
Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less eective at some movie recording
sizes.
z
The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more eective the image
stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less
eective the image stabilization will be.
z
When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
z
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur
noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the eects of the
Movie digital IS.
z
When using a TS-E lens, sh-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie digital
IS to [Disable] is recommended.
z
Since Movie digital IS magnies the image, the image looks more grainy.
Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
z
For details on lenses compatible with Combination IS, visit the Canon website.
z
“+” is added to the Movie digital IS icon (
=
268) when a lens compatible with
Combination IS is used.
270
Auto Level for Movies
Auto leveling helps keep movies straight as you record them.
Once recording begins, the display area may narrow, and subjects may
be enlarged.
1
Select [z: k Auto level].
2
Select [Enable].
z
Available when [
k
Digital IS] is set to [Disable].
271
Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously
during movie recording.
1
Select [z: Movie Servo AF].
2
Select [Enable].
z
When [Enable] is set:
z
The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are
not pressing the shutter button halfway.
z
To keep the focus at a specic position, or if you prefer not to record
mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie
Servo AF by touching [
Z
] in the lower left of the screen.
z
When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie recording after
operations such as pressing the <
M
> or <
x
> button or changing
the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
z
When [Disable] is set:
z
Press the shutter button halfway or press the AF start button to focus.
272
Movie Servo AF
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
z
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Dicult
y
A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
y
A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
y
When shooting with a higher f/number.
y
Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Dicult” (
=
208).
z
Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed,
the possible movie recording time (
=
580) will be shortened.
z
With certain lenses, the mechanical sound for focusing may be recorded.
In this case, using Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) may
reduce such sounds in the movie.
z
Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnied view.
z
During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie image
may momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnication).
273
Movie Servo AF
Movie Servo AF Track Sensitivity
You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which aects
responsiveness if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo AF,
as when interfering objects move across AF points or when you pan.
1
Select [z: Movie Servo AF track
sens.].
z
Locked on: –3/–2/–1
With this setting, the camera is less
likely to track a dierent subject if the
main subject strays from the AF point.
The closer the setting is to the minus (–)
symbol, the less the camera is inclined
to track a dierent subject. It is eective
when you want to prevent the AF points
from rapidly tracking something that is
not the intended subject during panning
or when an obstacle cuts across the AF
points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that
covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol,
the more responsive the camera is. It is eective when you want
to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera
changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.
z
Available when [
z
: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [
z
: AF method]
is set to [1-point AF].
z
Operation when [
z
: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point AF] is
equivalent to a setting of [0].
274
Movie Servo AF
Movie Servo AF Speed
You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF speed and its operation conditions.
The function is enabled when using a lens supporting slow focus transition
during movie recording*.
1
Select [z: Movie Servo AF speed].
z
When active:
You can set [Always on] to have the AF
speed take eect at all times for movie
recording (before and during movie
recording) or set [During shooting]
to have the AF speed take eect only
during movie recording.
z
AF speed:
You can adjust the AF speed (focus
transition speed) from the standard
speed (0) to slow (one of seven levels)
or fast (one of two levels) to obtain the
desired eect for the movie creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie
recording
USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible.
For details, refer to the Canon website.
275
Movie Servo AF
z
With certain lenses, even if you adjust the AF speed, the speed may not change.
z
Available when [
z
: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [
z
: AF method]
is set to [1-point AF].
z
Operation when [
z
: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point AF] is
equivalent to setting [AF speed] to [Standard (0)].
z
An asterisk to the right of [
z
: Movie Servo AF speed] indicates that the
default setting has been modied.
276
Other Menu Functions
[
z
1]
z
Lens aberration correction
Peripheral illumination and chromatic aberration can be corrected as you
record movies. For details on lens aberration correction, see
=
128.
z
Remote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie recording using
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately). First, pair the BR-E1
with the camera (
=
446).
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
For normal movie recording, set the BR-E1 release timing/movie
shooting switch to <
k
>, then press the release button.
For details on Time-lapse movie recording, see
=
260.
277
Other Menu Functions
[
z
2]
z
k
ISO speed settings
ISO speed
M
In [
M
] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also
select ISO Auto.
ISO speed range
For movie recording, you can set the manual ISO speed setting range
(minimum and maximum limits).
Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in movie recording in [
k
]
mode or in [
M
] mode with ISO Auto.
a
Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in time-lapse movie
recording in [
k
] mode or in [
M
] mode with ISO Auto.
z
ISO 25600 for movie recording is an expanded ISO speed (indicated by [H]).
z
Highlight tone priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies.
For details on Highlight tone priority, see
=
150.
z
[Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies with
[
z
: Highlight tone priority] set.
278
Other Menu Functions
[
z
5]
z
HDMI information display
You can congure information display for
image output via an HDMI cable.
With info
The image, shooting information, AF points, and other information is
shown on the other device via HDMI. Note that the camera screen
goes o. Recorded movies are saved to the card.
Clean /
H
output
HDMI output consists solely of 4K movies. Shooting information and
AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded
to the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
Clean /
L
output
HDMI output consists solely of Full HD movies. Shooting information
and AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is
recorded to the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
279
Other Menu Functions
[
z
6]
z
k
Auto slow shutter
You can choose whether to record movies
that are brighter than when set to [Disable]
by automatically slowing the shutter speed
under low light.
Applies when the frame rate of the movie
recording size is
8
or
7
.
Disable
Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement,
less aected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that
under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].
Enable
Enables you to record brighter movies than when set to [Disable]
by automatically reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or
1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.
z
Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under
low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.
280
General Movie Recording Cautions
Red [
E
] Internal Temperature Warning Icon
z
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
recording or under a high ambient temperature, a red [
E
] icon will appear.
z
The red [
E
] icon indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn o the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
z
Recording a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the
red [
E
] icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn o the
camera.
z
If [
F
] is displayed, see
=
565.
Recording and Image Quality
z
Image Stabilizer is active all times, even without the shutter button pressed
halfway, when you use an EF-M lens with [IS mode] in [
z
: IS settings] set
to [Enable], or an EF or EF-S lens with the lens Image Stabilizer switch set to
<
1
>. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total
movie recording time depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image
Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is recommended that
you set the IS switch to <
2
>.
z
If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the movie
may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with manual
exposure.
z
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the
screen.
z
Image noise or irregular colors may occur when shooting at high ISO speeds,
high temperatures, low shutter speeds, or under low light. Movies are recorded
almost exactly as they appear on the screen, except in time-lapse movie
recording.
z
If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may decline
or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support MP4 format).
281
General Movie Recording Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
z
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator
may appear on the right of the screen during movie
recording. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal
buer memory). The slower the card, the faster the
indicator will climb upward. If the indicator (1) becomes
full, movie recording will stop automatically.
z
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either not appear or the
level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, record a few test movies to see
if the card can write fast enough.
z
If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie recording stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
z
If the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator
appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Audio Restrictions
z
The following restrictions apply when recording movies that include sound.
y
Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
y
When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
(1)
282
283283
Flash Photography
This chapter describes how to shoot with the built-in ash or an
external ash (EL/EX Speedlites).
z
Flash cannot be used while you are recording movies.
z
AEB is not available in ash photography.
　
284
Shooting With the Built-in Flash
Using the built-in ash is recommended when the [
I
] icon appears on the
screen, when subjects in daytime shots are backlit, or when shooting under
low light.
1
Use the <I> lever to raise the
built-in ash.
2
Press the shutter button halfway.
z
Conrm that a [
I
] icon appears on the
screen.
3
Take the picture.
z
The built-in ash res according to
[Flash ring] settings (
=
290).
z
To retract the built-in ash after shooting,
push it down with your ngers until it
clicks into place.
Approximate Built-in Flash Range
(Maximum approx. range in meters / feet)
ISO Speed
(
=
143)
EF-M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM
Wide-angle End Telephoto End
f/3.5 f/6.3
400 2.6 / 8.6 1.5 / 4.8
3200 7.4 / 24.4 4.1 / 13.6
* It may not be possible to obtain standard exposure when shooting distant subjects at
high ISO speeds, or under certain subject conditions.
285
Shooting With the Built-in Flash
Shutter Speed and Aperture Value in Flash Photography
Shooting Mode Shutter Speed Aperture Value
d
Auto (1/200–30 sec.)* Automatically set
s
Manual (1/200–30 sec.) Automatically set
f
Auto (1/200–30 sec.)* Manually set
4
Manual (1/200–30 sec.) Manually set
* When [Slow synchro] under [
z
: Flash control] is set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
z
Do not use the built-in ash unless it is fully raised.
z
The bottom of images may be dark if light from the built-in ash is obstructed
by a lens hood, or by a subject that is too close.
z
If the bottom of images is dark when you use super telephoto or large-diameter
lenses, consider using an external Speedlite (sold separately,
=
300).
Flash Photography in <
f
> Mode
Flash output is automatically adjusted to provide suitable ash exposure for
your specied aperture value.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with autoash metering and the
background with a slow shutter speed, to provide standard exposure for
both the subject and background. Using a tripod is recommended.
286
Shooting With the Built-in Flash
Flash Exposure Compensation
M
Just as exposure compensation is adjustable, you can also adjust ash
output of the built-in ash.
1
Press the <D> button.
2
Press the <M> button.
3
Select [2exp. comp.].
4
Set the compensation amount.
z
To make ash exposure brighter, set the
compensation amount toward [Brighter]
(positive compensation), or to make it
darker, set it toward [Darker] (negative
compensation).
z
After you are nished shooting, follow
steps 1–4 to return the compensation
amount to zero.
287
Shooting With the Built-in Flash
z
When [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (
=
149) is set to an option other than
[Disable], images may still look bright even if negative compensation is set.
z
The exposure compensation amount will remain in eect even after you set the
power switch to <
2
>.
z
You can also set ash exposure compensation with [Built-in ash settings] in
[
z
: Flash control] (
=
292).
z
The camera can also be used to set the external Speedlite’s ash exposure
compensation in the same way as with the built-in ash.
FE Lock
M
Shooting with FE (ash exposure) Lock provides suitable ash exposure
over your specied area of the subject.
1
Use the <I> lever to raise the
built-in ash.
2
Press the shutter button halfway.
z
Press the shutter button halfway and
conrm that a [
I
] icon appears on the
screen.
288
Shooting With the Built-in Flash
3
Press the <A> button (8).
z
Center the subject on the screen, then
press the <
A
> button.
z
A preash is red by the ash, and the
required ash output level is retained.
z
[
d
] blinks.
z
Each time you press the <
A
> button,
a preash is red, and the ash output
required for shooting is retained.
4
Take the picture.
z
Compose the shot and press the shutter
button completely.
z
The [
D
] icon blinks when subjects are too far away and your shots would be
dark. Approach the subject and repeat steps 2–4.
289
Flash Function Settings
Functions of the built-in ash or external EL/EX series Speedlites can be set
from menu screens on the camera.
Before setting functions of external Speedlites, attach the Speedlite and turn
it on.
For details on external Speedlite functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
1
Select [z: Flash control].
2
Select an item.
290
Flash Function Settings
Flash Firing
Set to [
a
] to have the ash re
automatically, based on shooting
conditions.
Set to [
D
] to have the ash always re
when you shoot.
Set to [
b
] to disable ash ring.
E-TTL II Flash Metering
M
For normal ash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the ash
exposure will be averaged for the entire
metered scene.
Red-eye Reduction
Set to [Enable] to reduce red-eye by
emitting the red-eye reduction lamp before
ring the ash.
291
Flash Function Settings
Slow Synchro
M
You can set the ash-sync speed for ash
photography in <
f
> aperture-priority AE
mode or <
d
> Program AE mode.
z
[ ] 1/200-30sec. auto
The ash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec. to
30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used under
some shooting conditions, in low-light locations, and shutter speed is
automatically lowered.
z
[ ] 1/200-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light
conditions. It is eective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the ash, the
background may come out dark.
z
[ ] 1/200 sec. (xed)
The ash sync speed is xed at 1/200 sec. This more eectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out darker than
with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
z
To use slow-sync shooting in <
f
> or <
d
> mode, set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
292
Flash Function Settings
Built-in Flash Function Settings
M
z
Flash mode
Set to [E-TTL II] to shoot in E-TTL II/E-TTL
fully automatic ash mode.
Set to [Manual ash] to specify your
preferred ash output manually.
Available in <
s
>, <
f
>, <
a
>, and
<
t
> mode.
293
Flash Function Settings
z
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so
that the ash res immediately after the
exposure starts.
Set to [2nd curtain] and use low shutter
speeds for natural-looking shots of subject
motion trails, such as car headlights.
z
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to
1/80 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/100 sec. or faster, rst-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.
z
Flash exposure compensation
Just as exposure compensation is
adjustable, you can also adjust ash output
of the built-in ash (
=
286).
294
Flash Function Settings
External Flash Function Settings
M
The information displayed, position of display, and available options vary
depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings, the ash
mode, and other factors. Refer to the instruction manual of your ash unit
for details on its functions.
Sample display
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(5)
(1) Flash mode
(2) Wireless functions/
Firing ratio control
(3) Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
(4) Shutter synchronization
(5) Flash exposure compensation
(6) Flash exposure bracketing
z
Functions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not compatible
with ash function settings.
295
Flash Function Settings
z
Flash mode
You can select the ash mode to suit your desired ash photography.
[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of EL/EX
series Speedlites for automatic ash
photography.
[Manual ash] is for setting the Speedlite’s
[Flash output] yourself.
[CSP] (continuous shooting priority mode) is available when using a
compatible external Speedlite. This mode automatically reduces ash output
by one stop and increases ISO speed by one stop. Useful in continuous
shooting, and helps conserve ash battery power.
Regarding other ash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the respective ash mode.
z
Adjust exposure compensation (
=
140) as needed in case of overexposure
from ash photography with [CSP] in <
s
> or <
a
> mode.
z
With [CSP], ISO speed is automatically set to [Auto].
296
Flash Function Settings
z
Wireless functions
You can use radio or optical wireless
transmission to shoot with wireless multiple-
ash lighting.
For details on wireless ash, refer to
the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless ash photography.
z
Firing ratio control
With a macro ash, you can set the ring
ratio control.
For details on ring ratio control, refer to
the macro ash’s Instruction Manual.
z
Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming ash
head, you can set the ash coverage.
297
Flash Function Settings
z
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the ash res
immediately after the exposure starts.
Set to [Second-curtain synchronization] and use low shutter speeds for
natural-looking shots of subject motion trails, such as car headlights.
Set to [High-speed synchronization] for ash photography at higher
shutter speeds than the maximum ash sync shutter speed. This is eective
when shooting with an open aperture in <
f
> mode to blur the background
behind subjects outdoors in daylight, for example.
z
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/80 sec.
or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/100 sec. or faster, rst-curtain synchronization
will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is set.
z
Flash exposure compensation
Just as exposure compensation is
adjustable, you can also adjust ash output
of external Speedlites.
z
If ash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the
ash exposure compensation with the camera. Note that the Speedlite’s setting
overrides the camera’s if both are set at the same time.
298
Flash Function Settings
z
Flash exposure bracketing
External Speedlites equipped with ash
exposure bracketing (FEB) can change the
external ash output automatically as three
shots are taken at once.
External Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the external Speedlite’s
Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
z
With an EL/EX series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always re at full output if
the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL ash metering]
(autoash).
z
The external Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled
from the camera’s [
z
: External ash C.Fn setting] screen. Set it directly on
the external Speedlite.
299
Flash Function Settings
Clearing Flash Function Settings/Flash C.Fn Settings
M
1
Select [Clear settings].
2
Select the settings to be cleared.
z
Select [Clear built-in ash set.],
[Clear external ash set.],
or [Clear ext. ash C.Fn set.].
z
On the conrmation dialog, select [OK].
Then the ash settings or Custom
Function settings will all be cleared.
300
Shooting With External Speedlites
EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras
The camera supports ash photography using all functions of EL/EX series
Speedlites (sold separately).
For operation procedures, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite’s Instruction
Manual.
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series
z
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoash
mode, the ash can be red at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <
a
> or <
f
> and adjust the
aperture value before shooting.
z
When using a Speedlite that has manual ash mode, shoot in the manual
ash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact ash units at up to
1/200 sec. With large studio ash units, the ash duration is longer than
that of a compact ash unit and varies depending on the model. Be sure to
check before shooting if ash sync is properly performed by test shooting at
a sync speed of approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.
z
Retract the built-in ash before attaching an external Speedlite.
z
When shooting with an external Speedlite, set [
z
: Shutter mode] to an option
other than [Electronic] (
=
186).
z
If the camera is used with a ash unit or ash accessory dedicated to another
camera brand, the camera not only may not operate properly, but malfunction
may result.
z
Do not attach a high-voltage ash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may not
be red.
301301
Playback
This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back
captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings
on the Playback ([
x
]) tab.
z
Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for
images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that
have been edited or renamed on a computer.
z
Images may be displayed that cannot be used with certain playback
features.
302
Tab Menus: Playback
z
Playback 1
=
323
=
326
=
327
=
331
=
335
=
338
z
Playback 2
=
341
=
347
=
351
=
349
=
354
=
350
=
356
z
Playback 3
=
358
=
361
=
363
=
365
z
[
3
: RAW image processing] and [
3
: Quick Control RAW processing]
are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
303
Tab Menus: Playback
z
Playback 4
=
367
=
369
=
370
=
371
=
372
=
373
304
Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
2
Select an image.
z
To play back newer images, press the
<
Z
> button, and to play back older
images, press the <
Y
> button.
z
Each time you press the <
B
> button,
the display will change.
No information Basic information
display
Shooting information
display
3
Exit the image playback.
z
Press the <
x
> button to exit the image
playback.
305
Image Playback
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press the <
B
>
button to change the information displayed. You can also customize the
information displayed, in [
x
: Playback information display] (
=
367).
306
Image Playback
Touch Playback
The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control
playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones
and similar devices. First, press the <
x
> button to prepare for touch
playback.
Image browsing
Magnied view
Index displayJump display
z
You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one nger.
307
Magnified Image Display
You can magnify your captured images.
(1)
1
Magnify the image.
z
Turn the <
5
> dial for a magnied view
or index display. In magnied view, the
position of the magnied area (1) is
shown in the lower right of the screen.
2
Scroll the image.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to scroll the
image vertically and horizontally.
308
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
1
Switch to the index display.
z
During image playback, turn the <
5
>
dial counterclockwise.
z
The 4-image index display will appear.
The selected image is highlighted with
an orange frame.
Turning the <
5
> dial further
counterclockwise switches to 9, 36, and
100-image display.
Turning the dial the other way switches
to 100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image
display.
B B B B
2
Select an image.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the
orange frame and select the image.
z
Press <
0
> in the index display to
display the selected image.
309
Movie Playback
1
Play back the image.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
2
Select a movie.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
movie to play back.
z
In the single-image display, the [
s1
]
icon displayed on the upper left indicates
a movie.
z
In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As rolls cannot be played back
from the index display, press <
0
> to
switch to the single-image display.
3
In the single-image display, press
<0>.
310
Movie Playback
4
Press <0> to play back the
movie.
z
The movie will start playing back.
(
1
)
z
You can pause playback and display
the movie playback panel by pressing
<
0
>. Press it again to resume the
playback.
z
You can also adjust the volume during
movie playback by using the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
(1) Speaker
311
Movie Playback
Movie Playback Panel
Item Playback Operations
7
Play Pressing <
0
> toggles between playback and stop.
8
Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of
the screen.
T
Skip backward Skips backward approx. 4 sec. each time you press <
0
>.
3
Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <
0
>.
Holding <
0
> down will rewind the movie.
6
Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<
0
>. Holding <
0
> down will fast forward the movie.
v
Skip forward Skips forward approx. 4 sec. each time you press <
0
>.
X
Edit Displays the editing screen (
=
313).
I
Frame Grab
Available when you play 4K or 4K time-lapse movies.
Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as a
JPEG still image (
=
315).
y
Background music
Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(
=
353).
Playback position
mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Volume
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the speaker volume
(
=
309).
312
Movie Playback
Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums and Digest
Movies)
Item Playback Operations
7
Play Pressing <
0
> toggles between playback and stop.
8
Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of
the screen.
T
Previous clip
Displays the rst frame of the previous clip or video
snapshot.
3
Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <
0
>.
Holding <
0
> down will rewind the movie.
6
Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<
0
>. Holding <
0
> down will fast forward the movie.
v
Next clip Displays the rst frame of the next clip or video snapshot.
L
Erase clip Erases the current clip or video snapshot.
X
Edit Displays the editing screen (
=
317).
y
Background music
Plays back an album with the selected background music
(
=
353).
Playback position
mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Volume
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the speaker volume
(
=
309).
z
Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a
television for movie playback (
=
321). (Volume cannot be adjusted with the
<
W
> <
X
> keys.)
z
Movie playback may stop if the card’s read speed is too slow or movie les
have corrupted frames.
z
For details on the movie recording time available, see
=
580.
313
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the rst and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1
Pause movie playback.
z
The movie playback panel will appear.
2
On the movie playback panel,
select [X].
3
Specify the part to be edited out.
z
Select either [
U
] (Cut beginning) or [
V
]
(Cut end).
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys for frame-by-
frame playback.
z
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <
0
>. The portion indicated by
a line at the bottom of the screen will
remain.
4
Check the edited movie.
z
Select [
7
] to play the edited movie.
z
To change the edited part, go back to
step 3.
z
To cancel the editing, press the <
M
>
button.
314
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
(1) (2)
5
Save the image.
z
Select [
W
] (1).
z
The save screen will appear.
z
To save it as a new roll, select [New le].
To save it and overwrite the original
movie le, select [Overwrite].
z
Select [
] (2) to save a compressed
version of the le. 4K movies are
converted to Full HD movies before
compression.
z
On the conrmation dialog, select [OK]
to save the edited movie and return to
the movie playback screen.
z
Because editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (at the position
indicated by [
] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position where movies
are trimmed may dier from your specied position.
z
Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
z
You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
z
Compress and save is not available for movie recording sizes of
L6V
(NTSC) or
L5V
(PAL).
z
For instructions on editing video snapshot albums, see “Create Album”
(
=
351).
315
Frame Extraction
From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual
frames to save as approx. 8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still images.
This function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.
1
Play back the image.
z
Press the <
3
> button.
2
Select a 4K movie.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a 4K
movie or 4K time-lapse movie.
z
On the shooting information screen
(
=
590), 4K movies and 4K time-lapse
movies are indicated by an [
H
] icon.
z
In index display, press <
0
> to switch
to single-image display.
3
In the single-image display, press
<0>.
4
Pause movie playback.
z
The movie playback panel will appear.
5
Select a frame to grab.
z
Use the movie playback panel to select
the frame to grab as a still photo.
z
For movie playback panel instructions,
see
=
311.
316
Frame Extraction
6
Select [I].
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [
I
].
7
Save the image.
z
Select [OK] to save the current frame as
a JPEG still image.
8
Select the image to display.
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number.
z
Select [View original movie] or
[View extracted still image].
z
Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse movies,
HD movies, or with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies from a dierent camera.
317
Digest Movie Editing
Individual chapters (clips) recorded in <
D
> mode can be erased.
Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Display the image.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
2
Select a digest movie.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
digest movie.
z
In single-image display, digest movies
are labeled with [
s
D
] in the
upper left.
z
In index display, press <
0
> to switch
to single-image display.
3
In the single-image display, press
<0>.
4
Select [D].
z
Digest movie playback begins.
5
Press <0> to pause the digest
movie.
z
The movie playback panel will appear.
6
Select a clip.
z
Select [
T
] or [
v
] to select a clip.
318
Digest Movie Editing
7
Select [L].
8
Select [OK], then press <0>.
z
The clip is erased, and the digest movie
is overwritten.
z
Video snapshot albums can also be edited. Albums created with [
x
: Create
album] cannot be edited.
z
For other instructions on using the movie playback panel for digest movies, see
“Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums and Digest Movies)” (
=
312).
319
Still Photo Extraction from RAW Burst
Images
You can extract any image (as a JPEG or RAW image) from sets
(rolls,
=
137) captured in RAW burst mode.
1
Display the image.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
2
Select a roll.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a roll
le.
z
In the single-image display, the [
s
i
]
icon displayed on the upper left indicates
a roll.
z
In index display, press <
0
> to switch
to single-image display.
3
In the single-image display, press
<0>.
4
Select [i].
z
The roll is displayed.
5
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to extract.
z
To delete unneeded portions at
the beginning and end of the roll,
press <
X
>.
320
Still Photo Extraction from RAW Burst Images
6
Press <0>.
7
Select and save the image to
extract.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
[Extract as JPEG] or [Extract as
1
].
z
With [Extract as JPEG], you can
choose [Edit and save] and apply RAW
image processing (
=
341) before
saving.
z
Images saved when [Extract as JPEG] is selected are in [
73
] (18 megapixels)
quality.
z
Creative lters, cropping, and resizing are not available for JPEGs extracted
from RAW burst images or processed from a RAW image.
321
Playback on a TV Set
You can view your shots and movies on a TV by connecting the camera to a
TV with an HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft., with a Type D terminal
on the camera end).
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [
5
: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your television).
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
z
Insert the HDMI cable in the camera’s
<
D
> terminal.
2
Connect the HDMI cable to the
television.
z
Connect the HDMI cable to the
television’s HDMI IN port.
3
Turn on the television and switch
the television’s video input to
select the connected port.
4
Set the camera’s power switch
to <1>.
5
Press the <x> button.
z
The image will appear on the TV screen.
(Nothing will be displayed on the camera
screen.)
z
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
322
Playback on a TV Set
z
Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be
adjusted with the camera.
z
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
television, turn o the camera and television.
z
Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut o.
z
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <
D
>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
z
Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
z
It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay,
set [
5
: HDMI resolution] to [1080p] (
=
509).
z
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to
a television.
323
Protect Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.
Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [3: Protect images].
2
Select [Select images].
3
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to protect.
(1)
4
Protect the image.
z
Press <
0
> to protect the selected
image. The [
K
] icon (1) will appear at
the top of the screen.
z
To cancel the image protection, press
<
0
> again. The [
K
] icon will
disappear.
z
To protect another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
324
Protect Images
Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst
and last images for a range to protect all the specied images at once.
1
Select [Select range].
z
Select [Select range] in [
3
: Protect
images].
2
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
z
The images in the specied range will be
protected and the [
J
] icon will appear.
z
To select another image to be protected,
repeat step 2.
325
Protect Images
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [
3
: Protect
images], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be protected.
To cancel the selection, select [Unprotect
all images in folder] or [Unprotect all
images on card].
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
363), the display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all
found].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be protected.
If you select [Unprotect all found], the
protection of all the ltered images will be
canceled.
z
If you format the card (
=
490), the protected images will also be erased.
z
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must rst cancel the protection.
z
If you erase all the images (
=
330), only the protected images will remain.
This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary images at once.
326
Rotate Images
You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired
orientation.
1
Select [3: Rotate image].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to rotate.
3
Rotate the image.
z
Each time you press <
0
>, the image
will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° →
270° → 0°.
z
To rotate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
z
If you set [
5
: Auto rotate] to [On
z
D
] (
=
489) before taking vertical shots,
you need not rotate the image with this function.
z
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image
playback, set [
5
: Auto rotate] to [On
z
D
].
327
Erase Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase
them in one batch. Protected images (
=
323) will not be erased.
z
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer
need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being
erased accidentally, protect them.
Erasing a Single Image
1
Select the image to be erased.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to erase.
2
Press the <L> button.
3
Erase the images.
JPEG or RAW images or movies
z
Select [Erase].
RAW+JPEG images
z
Select an item.
328
Erase Images
Checkmarking [
X
] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those
images at once.
1
Select [3: Erase images].
2
Select [Select and erase images].
3
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to erase, then press <
0
>.
z
To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
4
Erase the images.
z
Press the <
M
> button, then press
[OK].
329
Erase Images
Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst
and last images for a range to erase all the specied images at once.
1
Select [Select range].
z
Select [Select range] in [
3
: Erase
images].
2
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
3
Press the <M> button.
4
Erase the images.
z
Select [OK].
330
Erase Images
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [
3
: Erase images] is set to [All
images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card
will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
363), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be erased.
z
To erase all the images including protected images, format the card (
=
490).
331
Print Ordering
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on
the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection,
quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photonisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, le number
imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specied
for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Option
1
Select [3: Print order].
2
Select [Set up].
3
Set the options as desired.
z
Set the [Print type], [Date], and
[File No.].
Print type
K
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one
sheet.
K
Both Prints both the standard and index prints.
L
Date
On
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.
O
File number
On
[On] imprints the le number.
O
332
Print Ordering
4
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
z
Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to
specify the images to be printed.
z
If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting
(
=
331), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case,
resize the image (
=
356), then print the index print.
z
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or le number may not
be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
z
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the
same time.
z
When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specications are
set. You cannot print in the specied print order if you extract just the images
from the card for printing.
z
Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photonishers may not be able to print
the images as you specied. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual before
printing, or check with your photonisher about compatibility when ordering
prints.
z
Do not use this camera to congure print settings for images with DPOF
settings set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten
inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the
image type.
333
Print Ordering
Specifying Images for Printing
z
Selecting Images
Select and specify the images one by one.
Press the <
M
> button to save the print
order to the card.
(1) (2)
z
Standard/Both
Press <
0
> to print a copy of the
displayed image. By pressing the <
W
>
<
X
> keys, you can set the number of
copies to be printed up to 99.
(1) Quantity
(2) Total images selected
(3) (4)
z
Index
Press <
0
> to add a checkmark to the
box [
X
]. The image will be included in
the index print.
(3) Checkmark
(4) Index icon
z
Selecting Multiple Images
Select Range
Under [Multiple], select [Select range].
Selecting the rst and last images of the
range marks all the images in the range
with a checkmark [
X
], and one copy of
each image will be printed.
334
Print Ordering
All Images in a Folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specied.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order
for all the images in the folder will be canceled.
All Images on a Card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be specied for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all
the images on the card.
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
363) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all
found images] and [Clear all found images].
All Found Images
If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images
ltered by the search conditions will be specied for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the ltered
images will be cleared.
z
RAW images or movies cannot be specied for printing. Note that RAW images
or movies will not be specied for printing even if you specify all images with
[Multiple].
z
When using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than
400 images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images may
not all be printed.
335
Photobook Set-up
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook.
When you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer,
the specied images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder.
This function is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [3: Photobook Set-up].
2
Select [Select images].
3
Select the image to be specied.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
image, then press <
0
>.
z
To select other images to be specied
for a photobook, repeat step 3.
336
Photobook Set-up
Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range
(start point to end point) of images to be specied for a photobook at once.
1
Select [Multiple].
z
Under [
3
: Photobook Set-up], select
[Multiple].
2
Select [Select range].
3
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
z
A checkmark [
X
] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
rst and last images.
337
Photobook Set-up
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a
photobook.
Under [
x
: Photobook Set-up], you can
set [Multiple] to [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] to specify all the
images in the folder or on the card for a
photobook.
To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in
folder] or [Clear all on card].
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
363) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [All found
images] and [Clear all found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be specied for the photobook.
If you select [Clear all found images], all
the photobook order of the ltered images
will be cleared.
z
RAW images or movies cannot be specied for the photobook. Note that RAW
images or movies will not be specied for the photobook even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
z
Do not use this camera to congure photobook settings for images with
photobook settings set up on another camera. All the photobook settings may
be overwritten inadvertently.
338
Creative Filters
You can apply the following lter processing to an image and save it as a
separate image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye eect, Art bold eect,
Water painting eect, Toy camera eect, and Miniature eect.
1
Select [3: Creative lters].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial to select the
image using the index display.
3
Select a lter eect (=339).
4
Adjust the lter eect.
z
Adjust the lter eect, then press
<
0
>.
z
For the Miniature eect, press the <
W
>
<
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to move the white
frame indicating the area that looks
sharp, then press <
0
>.
339
Creative Filters
5
Save the image.
z
Select [OK].
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number displayed, then select [OK].
z
To apply lter processing to other
images, repeat steps 2–5.
z
For images captured in RAW+JPEG shooting, lter processing is applied to the
RAW image, and the results are saved as a JPEG.
z
For RAW images captured at a specic aspect ratio, the resulting image is
saved at that aspect ratio after lter processing.
z
Images processed using the sh-eye eect lter will not have Dust Delete Data
(
=
174) appended.
Creative Filter Characteristics
z
I
Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast,
you can change the black-and-white eect.
z
G
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the
degree of softness.
z
X
Fish-eye eect
Gives the eect of a sh-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this lter eect, the area trimmed along the
periphery of the image changes. Also, because this lter eect magnies
the center of the image, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels, so set the lter
eect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
340
Creative Filters
z
J
Art bold eect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more three-
dimensional. By adjusting the eect, you can change the contrast and
saturation. Note that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not
be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have
signicant noise.
z
K
Water painting eect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors.
By adjusting the eect, you can change the color density. Note that night
scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have signicant noise.
z
H
Toy camera eect
Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners
of the image. Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.
z
c
Miniature eect
Creates a diorama eect. You can change where the image looks sharp.
To switch the orientation of the sharp area (white frame) in step 4, press
the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to switch from horizontal or the <
W
> <
X
> keys to
switch from vertical (or tap [
T
] on the screen).
341
M
RAW Image Processing
You can process
1
or
F
images with the camera to create JPEG
images. RAW images are not aected, so dierent conditions can be
applied to create JPEGs.
You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process
RAW images.
1
Select [3: RAW image
processing].
2
Select an item, then select images.
z
You can select multiple images to
process at once.
Select images
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to process, then press <
0
>.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
Select range
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
z
Press the <
M
> button.
342
RAW Image Processing
3
Set the desired processing
conditions.
Use shot settings
z
Images are processed using image
settings at the time of capture.
Customize RAW processing
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to
select an item.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to switch the setting.
z
Press <
0
> to access the function
setting screen.
z
To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <
S
> button.
Comparison screen
z
You can switch between the [After
change] and [Shot settings] screens
by pressing the <
B
> button and
turning the <
5
> dial.
z
Items in orange on the [After change]
screen have been modied since the
time of capture.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
4
Save the image.
z
When using [Customize RAW
processing], select [
W
] (Save).
z
Read the message and select [OK].
z
To process other images, select [Yes]
and repeat steps 2–4.
343
RAW Image Processing
5
Select the image to display.
z
Select [Original image] or
[Processed img.].
Magnied View
You can magnify images displayed for [Customize RAW processing]
by turning the <
5
> dial. Magnication varies depending on the [Image
quality] setting. Using <
V
> cross keys, you can scroll the magnied image
vertically and horizontally.
To cancel magnied view, turn the <
5
> dial the other way.
Images with Specied Aspect Ratios
JPEG images at the specied aspect ratio are created when you process
RAW images shot with [
z
: Still img aspect ratio] (
=
125) set to an
option other than [3:2].
344
RAW Image Processing
RAW Image Processing Options
z
[ ] Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments.
z
[ ] White balance (
=
155)
You can select the white balance. If you select [
Q
], you can select
[Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [
P
],
you can set the color temperature.
z
[ ] Picture Style (
=
163)
You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast,
and other parameters.
z
[ ] Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
149)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.
z
[ ] High ISO speed noise reduction (
=
172)
You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds.
If the eect is dicult to discern, magnify the image (
=
307).
z
[
73
] Image quality (
=
122)
You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG image.
345
RAW Image Processing
z
[ ] Color space (
=
162)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is
not compatible with Adobe RGB, the dierence in the image will hardly
be perceptible when either color space is set.
z
[ ] Lens aberration correction
[ ] Peripheral illumination correction (
=
129)
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the
lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected
image will be displayed. If the eect is dicult to discern, magnify
the image (
=
307) and check the four corners. The peripheral
illumination correction applied with the camera will be less pronounced
than that applied with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software)
at maximum correction amount. If the eects of correction are not
apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral
illumination correction.
[ ] Distortion correction (
=
129)
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected.
If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed.
The image periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting
as necessary.
[ ] Digital Lens Optimizer (
=
130)
Correct lens aberration, diraction, and low-pass lter-induced loss
of sharpness by applying optical design values. Magnify images
(
=
307) to check the eects of setting this option to [Enable].
Without magnication, the eect of Digital Lens Optimizer is not
displayed. Selecting [Enable] corrects both chromatic aberration and
diraction, although these options are not displayed.
346
RAW Image Processing
[ ] Chromatic aberration correction (
=
131)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due
to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the eect is dicult to discern,
magnify the image (
=
307).
[ ] Diraction correction (
=
131)
The diraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness
can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be
displayed. If the eect is dicult to discern, magnify the image
(
=
307).
z
Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the
same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
z
If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be
intensied with the eects of adjustment.
z
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensied together with
the eects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture
Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable], as needed.
z
The eect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used
and shooting conditions. Also, the eect may be dicult to discern depending
on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
347
Creative Assist
You can process RAW images by applying your preferred eects and saving
as JPEGs.
1
Select [3: Creative Assist].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to process, then press <
0
>.
3
Select an eect level.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
eect.
z
By selecting [Preset] and pressing
<
0
>, you can choose [VIVID],
[SOFT], or other preset eects.
[AUTO1], [AUTO2], and [AUTO3] are
eects recommended by the camera
based on image conditions.
348
Creative Assist
z
You can adjust eects such as
[Brightness] or [Contrast] by pressing
<
0
> and then using the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
z
Press <
0
> when adjustment is
nished.
z
To reset the eect, press the <
A
>
button.
z
To conrm the eect, press the <
S
>
button.
4
Save the image.
z
Select [OK].
349
M
Quick Control RAW Processing
You can select the type of RAW image processing performed from the Quick
Control screen.
1
Select [3: Quick Control RAW
processing].
2
Select an item.
z
Creative Assist
RAW processing that applies your
preferred eect (
=
347).
z
RAW image processing
RAW processing according to conditions
you specify (
=
341).
350
Red-Eye Correction
Automatically corrects portions of images aected by red-eye from ash.
The image can be saved as a separate le.
1
Select [3: Red-eye correction].
2
Select an image with <Y> <Z>.
z
After image selection, either touch [
E
]
or press <
0
>.
z
White frames are displayed around
corrected image areas.
3
Save the image.
z
Select [OK].
z
The image is saved as a separate le.
z
Some images may not be corrected accurately.
351
Create Album
You can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in an album.
1
Select [3: Create album].
2
Select an album to edit.
z
Press <
0
> to add a checkmark [
X
].
z
After selection, press the <
M
>
button.
3
Select [OK].
4
Select an editing option.
352
Create Album
Option Description
T
Rearrange video
snapshots
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a video snapshot to move,
then press <
0
>. Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to move it, then
press <
0
>.
L
Remove video
snapshot
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a video snapshot to delete,
then press <
0
>. Selected video snapshots are labeled [
L
].
To clear the selection and remove [
L
], press <
0
> again.
7
Play video
snapshot
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a video snapshot to play, then
press <
0
>. Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the volume.
5
Finish editing.
z
Press the <
M
> button when you are
nished editing.
z
Select [
W
] (Finish editing).
6
Save the image.
z
To check your editing, select [Preview].
z
To play an album with background
music, use [Background music] to
select the music (
=
353).
z
Selecting [Save] saves the edited album
as a new album.
z
Video snapshot albums can only be edited once.
353
Create Album
Selection of Background Music
Albums and slideshows can be played with background music once you
copy the music to the card, using EOS Utility (EOS software).
1
Select [Background music].
z
Set [Background music] to [On].
2
Select the background music.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select the
music, then press <
0
>. For [Slide
show], you can select multiple tracks.
3
Listen to a sample.
z
To listen to a sample, press the <
B
>
button.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the
volume. Press the <
B
> again to stop
playback.
z
To delete the music, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys to select it, then press the <
S
>
button.
z
For instructions on copying background music to cards, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
354
Cropping
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in RAW
cannot be cropped.
1
Select [x: Cropping].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to crop.
3
Set the cropping frame.
z
Press <
0
> to display the cropping
frame.
z
The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
z
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <
5
> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller the
cropping frame, the more magnied the cropped image will look.
z
Changing the Aspect Ratio and Orientation
Turn the <
5
> dial to select [
e
]. Press <
0
> to change the
cropping frame’s aspect ratio.
355
Cropping
z
Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.
Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.
z
Correcting the Tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the <
5
> dial to select [
c
], then
press <
0
>. While checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <
5
> dial
(in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right wedge (in 0.5° increments)
on the upper left of the screen to correct the tilt. After completing the tilt
correction, press <
0
>.
4
Check the image area to be
cropped.
z
Turn the <
5
> dial to select [
b
].
z
The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
5
Save the image.
z
Turn the <
5
> dial to select [
W
].
z
Select [OK] to save the cropped image.
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number, then select [OK].
z
To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 5.
z
The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the
angle set for tilt correction.
z
Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
z
AF point display information (
=
370) and Dust Delete Data (
=
174) will not
be appended to the cropped images.
356
Resizing
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as
a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG
3
,
4
, and
a
images. JPEG
b
and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [3: Resize].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to resize.
(1)
3
Select the desired image size.
z
Press <
0
> to display the image sizes.
z
Select the desired image size (1).
357
Resizing
4
Save the image.
z
Select [OK] to save the resized image.
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number, then select [OK].
z
To resize another image, repeat steps 2
to 4.
z
For details on image sizes of resized images, see
=
582.
358
Rating
You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 (
l
/
m
/
n
/
o
/
p
). This function is
called rating.
* Rating images can help you organize them.
Rating a Single Image
1
Select [3: Rating].
2
Select [Select images].
3
Select the image to be rated.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to rate.
4
Rate the image.
z
Press <
0
>, and a blue highlight frame
will appear as shown in the screen
shown on the left.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select a
rating mark, then press <
0
>.
z
When you append a rating mark to the
image, the number beside the set rating
will increase by one.
z
To rate another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
359
Rating
Rating by Specifying the Range
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst
and last images for a range to rate all the specied images at once.
1
Select [Select range].
z
Select [Select range] in [
3
: Rating].
2
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
z
A checkmark [
X
] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
rst and last images.
3
Press the <M> button.
4
Rate the image.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to select a rating
mark, then select [OK].
z
All the images in the specied range will
be rated (same rating) at once.
360
Rating
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [
3
: Rating], when you select
[All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the
card will be rated.
Turn the <
6
> dial to select a rating, then
select [OK].
When you are not rating images or
cancelling the rating, select [OFF].
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
363), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be rated as specied.
z
Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have
that rating.
z
With [
3
: Set image search conditions] and [
3
: Image jump w/
6
],
you can display only the images given a specic rating.
361
Slideshows
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Specify the images to be played
back.
z
To play back all the images on the card,
go to step 2.
z
If you want to specify the images to be
played back in the slide show, lter the
images with [
3
: Set image search
conditions] (
=
363).
2
Select [3: Slide show].
3
Set the playback as desired.
z
Select [Set up].
z
Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), and [Transition
eect] (eect when changing images)
for the still photos.
z
To play background music, use
[Background music] to select the
music (
=
353).
z
After completing the settings, press the
<
M
> button.
362
Slideshows
Display time Repeat
Transition eect Background music
4
Start the slide show.
z
Select [Start].
After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
5
Exit the slide show.
z
To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <
M
>
button.
z
To pause the slide show, press <
0
>. During pause, [
G
] will be displayed on
the upper left of the image. Press <
0
> again to resume the slide show.
z
During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the <
B
> button
to switch the display format (
=
304).
z
Volume during movie playback can be adjusted by pressing the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
z
During auto playback or pause, you can press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to view
another image.
z
During auto playback, auto power o will not take eect.
z
The display time may dier depending on the image.
363
Set Image Search Conditions
You can lter image display according to your search conditions.
After setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display
only the found images.
You can also protect, rate, erase, play a slide show, and apply other
operations to ltered images.
1
Select [3: Set image search
conditions].
(1)
2
Set the search conditions.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select an
item.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to set the
setting.
A checkmark [
X
] (1) is appended to the
left of the item. (Specied as the search
condition.)
z
If you select the item and press the
<
B
> button, the checkmark [
X
] will
be removed. (The search condition is
canceled.)
Item Description
9
Rating Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
d
Date Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
n
Folder Displays images in the selected folder.
J
Protect Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
f
Type of le Displays images in the selected le type.
364
Set Image Search Conditions
3
Apply the search conditions.
z
Press <
0
> and read the message
displayed.
z
Select [OK].
z
The search condition is specied.
(2)
4
Display the found images.
z
Press the <
3
> button.
z
Only the images that match the set
conditions (ltered) will be played back.
z
When the images are ltered for display,
the screen will have an outer yellow
frame (2).
Clearing the Search Conditions
Access the screen in step 2, then press the <
S
> button to remove all the
checkmarks [
X
]. Press <
0
> to clear the search conditions.
z
If no images match the search conditions, [OK] is not available on the screen
in step 2.
z
Search conditions may be cleared if you perform power, card, or image editing
operations.
z
Auto power o time may be extended while the [
3
: Set image search
conditions] screen is displayed.
365
Main Dial Browsing
In the single-image display, you can turn the <
6
> dial to jump through the
images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [x: Image jump w/6].
2
Select the jump method.
z
With [Jump images by the specied number], you can turn the <
6
> dial to
select the number of images to jump by.
z
When you select [Display by image rating], turn the <
6
> dial to specify the
rating (
=
358). If you browse images with
9
selected, all the rated images
will be displayed.
366
Main Dial Browsing
(1) (2)
3
Browse by jumping.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
z
In the single-image display, turn the
<
6
> dial.
z
You can browse by the set method.
(1) Jump method
(2) Playback position
z
To search images by shooting date, select [
g
: Date].
z
To search images by folder, select [
h
: Folder].
z
If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [
i
: Movies] or
[
j
: Stills] to display one or the other.
367
Playback Information Display
You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during
image playback.
1
Select [3: Playback information
display].
2
Add a checkmark [X] next to the
number of screens to display.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select a
number.
z
Press <
0
> to add a checkmark [
X
].
z
Repeat these steps to add a checkmark
[
X
] to the number of each screen to
display, then select [OK].
z
Your selected information can be
accessed by pressing the <
B
>
button during playback.
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the
exposure level distribution and overall
brightness. The RGB histogram is for
checking the color saturation and gradation.
You can switch the histogram displayed by
pressing the <
B
> button when [
z
]
is displayed in the lower left of the [
x
:
Playback information display] screen.
368
Playback Information Display
z
[Brightness] display
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level.
The horizontal axis indicates the brightness
level (darker on the left and brighter on the right)
while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels
exist for each brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker the image.
The more pixels there are toward the right, the
brighter the image. If there are too many pixels
on the left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there
are too many pixels on the right, the highlight
detail will be lost. The gradation in-between will
be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure
level inclination and the overall gradation.
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
Sample Histograms
z
[RGB] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the
left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels
there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there
are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be
lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too
saturated with no gradation. By checking the image’s RGB histogram,
you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as
white balance inclination.
369
Highlight Alert
You can specify blinking display of overexposed highlights on the playback
screen. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where
you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure
compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result.
1
Select [3: Highlight alert].
2
Select [Enable].
370
AF Point Display
You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined
in red on the playback screen. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple
AF points may be displayed.
1
Select [3: AF point disp.].
2
Select [Enable].
371
Playback Grid
You can display a grid over still photos shown in single-image display on
the playback screen. This function is convenient for checking the image’s
vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition.
1
Select [3: Playback grid].
2
Select an item.
372
View from Last Seen
You can specify which image is displayed rst when you start image
playback.
1
Select [3: View from last seen].
2
Select an item.
z
[Enable]: Playback resumes from the
last image displayed (except when you
have just nished shooting).
z
[Disable]: Playback resumes from your
most recent shot whenever the camera
is restarted.
373
Magnification (Approx.)
You can set the initial magnication ratio and position for the magnied view.
1
Select [3: Magnicatn (apx)].
2
Select an item.
z
2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)
The magnied view starts at the image center at the selected
magnication.
z
Actual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%.
The magnied view starts at the AF point that achieved focus.
z
Same as last magnication (from center)
The magnication will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnied view with the <
M
> or <
x
> button. The magnied view
starts at the image center.
z
Magnied view starts from the center of images captured using manual focus
or without focusing, even when [Actual size (from selected pt)] is selected.
374
375375
Wireless Features
This chapter describes how to connect the camera to a
smartphone wirelessly via Bluetooth
®
or Wi-Fi
®
and send images
to devices or Web services, how to control the camera from a
computer or wireless remote control, and other operations.
Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage
from erroneous wireless communication settings when using the
camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other
loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
When using wireless communication functions, establish
appropriate security at your own risk and discretion.
Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused
by unauthorized access or other security breaches.
376
Tab Menus: Wireless Tab
z
Wireless 1
=
377
=
452
=
453
=
454
=
455
=
460
z
Wireless communication is not available while the camera is connected via an
interface cable to a computer or other device.
z
Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to
devices via Wi-Fi.
z
The camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in the camera
(except for [
D
]). Also, for [
l
] and Web services, the camera cannot be
connected via Wi-Fi if there are no images saved on the card.
z
The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera’s power to <
2
>
or open the card slot/battery compartment cover.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power o does
not function.
377
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item for the camera to
connect to.
q
Connect to smartphone (
=
379)
Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi-Fi
connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or
tablets (collectively referred to as “smartphones” in this manual).
D
Use with EOS software or other dedicated software (
=
408)
Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera
remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software). With the dedicated application
Image Transfer Utility 2, images on the camera can also be sent to a
computer automatically.
l
Print from Wi-Fi printer (
=
416)
Connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via
Wi-Fi to print images.
378
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection
R
Upload to Web service (
=
426)
Share images with friends or family on social media or the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photo service for Canon customers after you complete
member registration (free of charge).
K
Connect to Wireless Remote (
=
446)
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(sold separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.
379
Connecting to a Smartphone
You can do the following after pairing the camera with a smartphone
compatible with Bluetooth low energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”).
z
Establish a Wi-Fi connection using only the smartphone (
=
381).
z
Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is o (
=
387).
z
Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone
(
=
455).
z
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (
=
386).
You can also do the following after connecting the camera to a smartphone
via Wi-Fi.
z
Browse and save images on the camera from a smartphone (
=
386).
z
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (
=
386).
z
Send images to a smartphone from the camera (
=
395).
Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone
Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that
pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen.
z
To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection via
Access Points” (
=
441).
380
Connecting to a Smartphone
Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone
The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on
the smartphone on which Android or iOS is installed.
z
Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.
z
Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google
Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear
when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.
z
For the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the
download site of Camera Connect.
z
Sample screens and other details in this guide may not match the actual user
interface elements after camera rmware updates or updates to Camera
Connect, Android, or iOS.
381
Connecting to a Smartphone
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
382
Connecting to a Smartphone
4
Select an item.
z
If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
z
If Camera Connect is not installed,
select [Android] or [iOS], scan the
displayed QR code with the smartphone
to access Google Play or App Store and
install Camera Connect.
5
Select [Pair via Bluetooth].
z
Pairing now begins.
z
To pair with a dierent smartphone after
pairing with one initially, select [OK] on
the screen at left.
383
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Smartphone (1)
6
Start Camera Connect.
7
Tap the camera for pairing.
z
If you are using an Android smartphone,
go to step 9.
8
Tap on [Pair] (iOS only).
Steps on the Camera (2)
9
Select [OK].
384
Connecting to a Smartphone
10
Press <0>.
z
Pairing is now complete, and the camera
is connected to the smartphone via
Bluetooth.
A Bluetooth icon appears on the main
Camera Connect screen.
z
The camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same time via
Bluetooth. To switch to a dierent smartphone for the Bluetooth connection,
see
=
458.
z
Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera’s auto
power o is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use
the camera.
Troubleshooting Pairing
z
Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone will
prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again, remove
pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen.
z
With a Bluetooth connection established, you can operate the camera to send
images to the smartphone (
=
395).
385
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Smartphone (2)
11
Tap on a Camera Connect function.
z
In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is
displayed to conrm camera connection.
z
For the Camera Connect functions, see
=
386.
z
When a Wi-Fi connection is established,
the screen for the selected function will
appear.
z
[
q
Wi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera.
z
The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on
the main Camera Connect screen.
The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now
complete.
z
For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (
=
403).
z
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth
connection.
z
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, start Camera Connect and tap the function you
will use.
386
Connecting to a Smartphone
[
q
Wi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
z
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Conrm set.
z
You can check the settings.
Error details
z
When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of
the error.
Camera Connect Functions
Images on camera
z
Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated.
z
Images can be saved on a smartphone.
Remote live view shooting
z
Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone.
Auto transfer
z
Enables camera and app setting adjustment to send shots to a
smartphone automatically as they are captured (
=
394).
Bluetooth remote controller
z
Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth. (Not available when connected via Wi-Fi.)
z
Auto power o is disabled while you are using the Bluetooth remote
controller feature.
Location information
z
Not supported on this camera.
Camera settings
z
Camera settings can be changed.
387
Connecting to a Smartphone
Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is O
Even when the camera power switch is set to <
2
>, as long as it is paired
to a smartphone via Bluetooth, you can use the smartphone to connect via
Wi-Fi.
1
Select [k: Bluetooth settings].
2
Set [Stay conn. if o] to [Enable].
z
With the camera power switch set to
<
2
>, tap [Images on camera] in the
Camera Connect menu to start the Wi-Fi
connection.
z
In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is
displayed to conrm camera connection.
Images on the camera are listed when
the Wi-Fi connection is established.
388
Connecting to a Smartphone
z
You can use Camera Connect to save images to the smartphone, and
you can delete images on the camera.
z
To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, tap on [
] on the main Camera
Connect screen (
=
403).
z
This function can no longer be used if the wireless settings are reset or the
smartphone connection information is erased.
Canceling the Pairing
Cancel pairing with a smartphone as follows.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Edit/delete device].
389
Connecting to a Smartphone
4
Select the smartphone to cancel
paring with.
z
Smartphones currently paired with the
camera are labeled [
s
].
5
Select [Delete connection
information].
6
Select [OK].
7
Clear the camera information on
the smartphone.
z
In the smartphone’s Bluetooth setting
menu, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
390
Connecting to a Smartphone
Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
4
Select an item.
z
If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
391
Connecting to a Smartphone
5
Select [Connect via Wi-Fi].
(1)
(2)
6
Check the SSID (network name)
and password.
z
Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
z
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required (
=
452).
z
By selecting [Switch network] in step 6, you can establish a Wi-Fi connection
via an access point (
=
441).
392
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Smartphone
Smartphone’s screen
(sample)
7
Operate the smartphone to
establish a Wi-Fi connection.
z
Activate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi
function, then tap the SSID (network
name) checked in step 6.
z
For the password, enter the password
checked in step 6.
8
Start Camera Connect and tap the
camera to connect to via Wi-Fi.
Steps on the Camera (2)
9
Select [OK].
z
To specify viewable images, press the
<
B
> button. See step 5 on
=
405
to set them.
393
Connecting to a Smartphone
z
The main window of Camera Connect
will be displayed on the smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is
now complete.
z
Operate the camera using Camera
Connect (
=
386).
z
For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (
=
403).
z
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (
=
449).
z
When connected via Wi-Fi, you can send images to a smartphone from the
Quick Control screen during playback (
=
395).
394
Connecting to a Smartphone
Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot
Your shots can be automatically sent to a smartphone. Before following
these steps, make sure the camera and smartphone are connected via
Wi-Fi.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
2
Select [Send to smartphone after
shot].
3
In [Auto send], select [Enable].
4
Set [Size to send].
5
Take the picture.
395
Connecting to a Smartphone
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.
1
Play back the image.
2
Press the <Q> button.
3
Select [qSend images to
smartphone].
z
If you perform this step while connected
via Bluetooth, a message is displayed,
and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi
connection.
4
Select sending options and send
the images.
396
Connecting to a Smartphone
(1) Sending Images Individually
1
Select an image to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2
Select [Send img shown].
z
In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
z
When sending movies, you can select
the image quality of movies to send in
[Quality to send].
(2) Sending Multiple Selected Images
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send selected].
397
Connecting to a Smartphone
3
Select images to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display. To return to single-image
display, turn the <
5
> dial clockwise.
z
After selecting the images to send, press
the <
M
> button.
4
Exit image selection.
z
Select [OK].
5
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
398
Connecting to a Smartphone
6
Select [Send].
(3) Sending a Specied Range of Images
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send range].
3
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Select the last image (end point).
z
To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial either way to
change the number of images in index
display.
399
Connecting to a Smartphone
4
Conrm the range.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
5
Exit image selection.
z
Select [OK].
6
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
7
Select [Send].
400
Connecting to a Smartphone
(4) Sending All Images on the Card
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all card].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
4
Select [Send].
401
Connecting to a Smartphone
(5) Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Set Image Search Conditions”
(
=
363).
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all found].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
4
Select [Send].
402
Connecting to a Smartphone
Ending Image Transfer
Sending Images from the Camera When Paired via Bluetooth (Android)
z
Press the <
M
> button on the image
transfer screen.
z
Select [OK] on the screen on the left
to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi
connection.
Sending Images from the Camera over a Wi-Fi Connection
z
Press the <
M
> button on the image
transfer screen.
z
For instructions on disconnecting
from Wi-Fi, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (
=
403).
403
Connecting to a Smartphone
z
During the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the
camera’s shutter button is pressed.
z
You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.
z
You can select up to 999 les at a time.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
z
Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that
time. Note that
b
size still photos are not reduced.
z
Selecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time.
z
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
Terminating Wi-Fi Connections
Perform either of the following operations.
On the Camera Connect screen,
tap on [
].
On the [qWi-Fi on] screen, select
[Disconnect,exit].
z
If the [
q
Wi-Fi on] screen is not
displayed, select [
k
: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
z
Select [Disconnect,exit], then select
[OK] on the conrmation dialog.
404
Connecting to a Smartphone
Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones
Images can be specied after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Edit/delete device].
4
Select a smartphone.
z
Select the name of the smartphone on
which you want to make the images
viewable.
405
Connecting to a Smartphone
5
Select [Viewable imgs].
6
Select an item.
z
Select [OK] to access the setting
screen.
[All images]
All images stored on the card become viewable.
[Images from past days]
Specify viewable images on the shooting-
date basis. Images shot up to nine days
ago can be specied.
z
When [Images shot in past days] is
selected, images shot up to the specied
number of days before the current date
become viewable. Use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys to specify the number of days, then
press <
0
> to conrm the selection.
z
Once you select [OK], the viewable
images are set.
z
If [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images], remote
shooting is not possible.
406
Connecting to a Smartphone
[Select by rating]
Specify viewable images depending on
whether a rating is appended (or not
appended) or by the type of rating.
z
Once you select the type of rating,
the viewable images are set.
[File number range] (Select range)
(1) (2)
Select the rst and last images from images
arranged by the le number to specify the
viewable images.
1. Press <
0
> to display the image
selection screen.
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image.
You can turn the <
5
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2. Select an image as the starting point (1).
3. Use <
Z
> to select an image as the
ending point (2).
4. Select [OK].
407
Connecting to a Smartphone
z
If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
y
Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue.
y
Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are
unavailable.
z
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
z
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
z
When saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if you
press the camera’s shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn o.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
408
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi
and perform camera operations using EOS software or other dedicated
software. Install the latest version of software on the computer before
setting up a Wi-Fi connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility
Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can import images from the camera,
control the camera, and perform other operations.
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [DRemote control
(EOS Utility)].
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
409
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
(1)
(2)
4
Check the SSID (network name)
and password.
z
Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
z
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required. For details,
see
=
452.
Steps on the Computer (1)
Computer’s screen (sample)
5
Select the SSID, then enter the
password.
z
On the computer’s network setting
screen, select the SSID checked in
step 4.
z
For the password, enter the password
checked in step 4.
410
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
6
Select [OK].
z
The following message is displayed.
“******” represents the last six digits of
the MAC address of the camera to be
connected.
Steps on the Computer (2)
7
Start EOS Utility.
8
In EOS Utility, click [Pairing over
Wi-Fi/LAN].
z
If a rewall-related message is
displayed, select [Yes].
9
Click [Connect].
z
Select the camera to connect to, then
click [Connect].
411
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (3)
10
Establish a Wi-Fi connection.
z
Select [OK].
[
D
Wi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
z
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Conrm set.
z
You can check the settings.
Error details
z
When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs,
you can check the details of the error.
The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete.
z
Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer.
z
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (
=
449).
412
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
z
z
If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
y
Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue.
y
Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.
z
Shooting operations using the camera are not possible after you use EOS
Utility to switch from still photo shooting mode to movie recording mode.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection to EOS Utility established, certain functions are
unavailable.
z
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
z
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
z
In Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower
compared to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects
cannot be displayed smoothly.
413
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Sending Images on the Camera Automatically
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images
on the camera to a computer automatically.
Steps on the Computer (1)
1
Connect the computer and access
point and start Image Transfer
Utility 2.
z
The screen to set up pairing is shown
when you follow the instructions
displayed the rst time Image Transfer
Utility 2 starts up.
Steps on the Camera (1)
2
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
z
Select [
k
: Wi-Fi settings].
z
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
3
In [Auto send], select [Enable].
414
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
4
Select [OK].
5
Connect to an access point via
Wi-Fi.
z
Establish a Wi-Fi connection
between the camera and the
access point connected to
the computer. For connection
instructions, see “Wi-Fi Connection
via Access Points” (
=
441).
6
Select the computer to pair the
camera with.
Steps on the Computer (2)
7
Pair the camera and computer.
z
Select the camera, then click [Pairing].
415
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
8
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
z
Select [
k
: Wi-Fi settings].
z
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
9
Select [Image sending options].
10
Select what to send.
z
If you select [Selected imgs] in [Range
to send], specify the images to send on
the [Select images to send] screen.
z
After the settings are complete, turn the
camera o.
Images on the camera are automatically sent to the active computer when
you turn the camera on within range of the access point.
z
If images are not sent automatically, try restarting the camera.
416
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the
camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via Wi-Fi.
For printer operating instructions, refer to the printer user manual.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [lPrint from Wi-Fi printer].
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
417
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
(1)
(2)
4
Check the SSID (network name)
and password.
z
Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
z
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required (
=
452).
5
Set up the printer.
z
On the Wi-Fi settings menu of the printer
to be used, select the SSID you have
checked.
z
For the password, enter the password
checked in step 4.
6
Select the printer.
z
In the list of detected printers, select the
printer to connect to via Wi-Fi.
z
If your preferred printer is not listed,
selecting [Search again] may enable
the camera to nd and display it.
z
To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection via
Access Points” (
=
441).
418
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Image Printing
Printing Images Individually
1
Select the image to be printed.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to print, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2
Select [Print image].
3
Print the image.
z
For the print setting procedures,
see
=
421.
z
Select [Print], then [OK] to start printing.
419
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Printing According to Specied Image Options
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Print order].
3
Set the printing options.
z
For the print setting procedures, see
“Print Ordering” (
=
331).
z
If the print order is complete before
establishing a Wi-Fi connection, go to
step 4.
4
Select [Print].
z
[Print] can be selected only when an
image is selected and the printer is
ready to print.
5
Set the [Paper settings] (=421).
420
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
6
Print the image.
z
When [OK] is selected, printing starts.
z
Shooting is not possible while connected to a printer via Wi-Fi.
z
Movies cannot be printed.
z
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
z
Certain printers may not be able to imprint the le number.
z
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
z
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright
background or on the border.
z
RAW images cannot be printed by selecting [Print order]. When printing,
select [Print image] and print.
z
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
z
Depending on the image’s le size and image quality, it may take some time to
start printing after you select [Print].
z
To stop printing, press <
0
> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].
z
When printing with [Print order], if you stopped printing and want to resume
printing of the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not
resume if any of the following occurs.
y
You change the print order or delete any of the print ordered images before
resuming printing.
y
When index is set, you change the paper setting before resuming printing.
z
If a problem occurs during printing, see
=
425.
421
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Print Settings
The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer.
Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Print setting screen
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)(8)
(1) Sets date or le number printing (
=
423).
(2) Sets the printing eects (
=
423).
(3) Sets the number of copies to print (
=
423).
(4) Sets the print area (
=
424).
(5) Sets the paper size, type, and layout (
=
422).
(6) Returns to the image selection screen.
(7) Starts the printing.
(8) The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings may not be selectable.
422
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Paper Settings
z
Select [Paper settings].
[
Q
] Setting the Paper Size
z
Select the size of the paper in the
printer.
[
Y
] Setting the Paper Type
z
Select the type of the paper in the
printer.
[
U
] Setting the Page Layout
z
Select the page layout.
z
If the image’s aspect ratio is dierent from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,
the image may be cropped signicantly when you print it as a borderless print.
Images may also be printed at lower resolution.
423
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
[
I
] Setting the Date/File Number Imprinting
z
Select [
I
].
z
Select what to print.
[
E
] Setting the Printing Eects (Image Optimization)
z
Select [
E
].
z
Select printing eects.
z
If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO speed
(H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
z
The [Default] setting for printing eects and other options are the printer’s
own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the printer’s
instruction manual to nd out what the [Default] settings are.
[
R
] Setting the Number of Copies
z
Select [
R
].
z
Select the number of copies to print.
424
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Cropping the Image
Set cropping immediately before
printing. Changing other print settings after
you crop images may require you to crop
the images again.
1
On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2
Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
z
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The shape
of the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Use the <
5
> dial to resize the cropping frame.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use the <
V
> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.
Switching the Orientation of the Cropping Frame
Pressing the <
B
> button will toggle the cropping frame between the
vertical and horizontal orientations.
3
Press <0> to exit the cropping.
z
You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print
setting screen.
425
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
z
Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you
specied.
z
The smaller the cropping frame, the lower the resolution at which images are
printed.
Handling Printer Errors
z
If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For details on
resuming printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Error Messages
z
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the camera
screen. After xing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to x a
printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
z
Conrm that paper is loaded correctly.
Ink Error
z
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
z
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
z
The selected image cannot be printed. Images taken with a dierent camera or
images edited with a computer may not be printable.
426
Sending Images to a Web Service
This section describes how to use Web services to send images.
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.
z
A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and
other Web services.
z
Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on versions of
browsers (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer) and settings required for
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY access.
z
For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/cig/).
z
For CANON iMAGE GATEWAY instructions and setting details, refer to
the help information for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
z
If you also intend to use Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, you must have an account with the services you intend to
use. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you
will register.
z
Fees to connect to your provider and communication fees to access your
provider’s access point are charged separately.
427
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone.
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [RUpload to Web service].
3
Select [I Agree].
4
Establish a Wi-Fi connection.
z
Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi.
Go to step 7 on
=
442.
428
Sending Images to a Web Service
5
Enter your email address.
z
Enter your email address, then select
[OK].
6
Enter a four-digit number.
z
Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
then select [OK].
7
Select [OK].
z
The [
R
] icon changes to [
].
429
Sending Images to a Web Service
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
8
Set up camera web link.
z
Access the page in the notication
message.
z
Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera web link settings
page.
Steps on the Camera (2)
9
Add CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a
destination.
z
Select [
].
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is now
added.
430
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering Other Web Services
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
1
Congure the Web service you
want to use.
z
Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
website and access the camera web link
settings page.
z
Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
Steps on the Camera
2
Add the Web service you
congured as a destination.
z
Select [
k
: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
z
Select [
].
431
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images
You can share images with your family and friends by sending images from
the camera to a Web service registered on the camera or by sending Web
links of the online albums.
Connecting to Web Services via Wi-Fi
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select a Web service.
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
z
A screen to select a destination may be
displayed, depending on the type and
settings of the Web service (
=
444).
432
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images Individually
1
Select an image to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2
Select [Send img shown].
z
In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
433
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Multiple Selected Images
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send selected].
3
Select images to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial
counterclockwise to switch to three-
image display for image selection. To
return to single-image display, turn the
<
5
> dial clockwise.
z
After selecting the images to send, press
the <
M
> button.
434
Sending Images to a Web Service
4
Select [Size to send].
z
When YouTube is selected as the
destination, [Size to send] is not
displayed.
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
5
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
435
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending a Specied Range of Images
Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at once.
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send range].
3
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Select the last image (end point).
Images will be selected and [
X
] will
appear.
z
To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
z
You can turn the <
5
> dial to change
the number of images shown in the
index display.
4
Conrm the range.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
436
Sending Images to a Web Service
5
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
6
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
437
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending All Images on the Card
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all card].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
4
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
438
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Set Image Search Conditions”
(
=
363).
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all found].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
439
Sending Images to a Web Service
4
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
440
Sending Images to a Web Service
z
With a Wi-Fi connection to a Web service established, a picture cannot be
taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed.
z
When sending an image to a Web service other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, a send error message may not be displayed even if the image has
not been sent to the Web service successfully. Since such send errors can be
checked on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site, check the error content, then
try sending the image again.
z
Depending on the Web service, the type or number of images that can be sent
and the length of movies will be limited.
z
Certain images may not be able to be sent with [Send range], [Send all card],
or [Send all found].
z
When you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time are
resized. Note that movies or
b
size still photos are not reduced.
z
[Reduced] is enabled only for still photos shot with cameras of the same model
as this camera. Still photos shot with other models are sent without resizing.
z
When accessing CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you can check the send history
for the Web services that the images were sent to.
z
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
441
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point
compatible with WPS (PBC mode).
First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it.
It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
z
When [
q
Connect to smartphone]
is selected, the screen on the left is
displayed. If Camera Connect is already
installed, select [Do not display].
z
On the [Connect to smartphone]
screen displayed next, select [Connect
via Wi-Fi].
442
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
4
Select [Switch network].
z
Displayed when [
q
], [
D
], or [
l
] is
selected.
5
Select [Connect with WPS].
z
For [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 5, see
=
444.
6
Select [WPS (PBC mode)].
z
Select [OK].
7
Connect to the access point via
Wi-Fi.
z
Press the access point’s WPS button.
z
Select [OK].
443
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
8
Select [Auto setting].
z
Select [OK] to access the setting screen
for the Wi-Fi function.
z
If an error occurs with [Auto setting],
see
=
444.
9
Specify the settings for the Wi-Fi
function.
[qConnect to smartphone]
z
On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen,
tap the SSID (network name) shown on
the camera, then enter the password of
the access point for the connection.
Go to step 8 on
=
392.
[DRemote control (EOS Utility)]
Go to step 7 or 8 on
=
410.
[lPrint from Wi-Fi printer]
Go to step 6 on
=
417.
Registering CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY
Go to step 5 on
=
428.
444
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Send To Screen
A screen to select a destination may be displayed depending on the Web
service.
To register destinations or to specify the settings, you must use a computer.
For more information, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
z
The [Send to] screen may be displayed.
z
Select the destination from the list of
registered destinations.
z
The procedures for setting up a
connection and sending images are the
same as those for other Web services.
Camera Access Point Mode
Camera access point mode is a connection
mode for connecting the camera directly to
each device via Wi-Fi.
Displayed when [
q
], [
D
], or [
l
] is
selected in [Wi-Fi function].
Manual IP Address Setup
The items displayed vary depending on the Wi-Fi function.
1
Select [Manual setting].
z
Select [OK].
445
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
2
Select an item.
z
Select an item to access the screen for
numerical input.
z
To use a gateway, select [Enable],
then select [Address].
3
Enter the desired values.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to move the input
position in the upper area and use the
<
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the number.
Press <
0
> to enter the selected
number.
z
To set the entered values and return to
the screen for step 2, select [OK].
4
Select [OK].
z
When you have completed setting the
necessary items, select [OK].
z
If you are not sure what to enter, see
“Checking Network Settings” (
=
477),
or ask the network administrator or
another person knowledgeable about
the network.
446
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(sold separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting (
=
223).
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [KConnect to Wireless
Remote].
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
4
Pair the devices.
z
When the [Pairing] screen appears,
press and hold the <W> and <T>
buttons on the BR-E1 simultaneously for
at least 3 sec.
z
After a message conrms that the
camera is paired with the BR-E1,
press <
0
>.
447
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
5
Set up the camera for remote
shooting.
z
When shooting still photos, select [
Q
]
or [
k
] as the drive mode (
=
135).
z
When recording movies, set [
z
:
Remote control] to [Enable].
z
For instructions after the pairing
is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s
Instruction Manual.
z
Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera’s auto
power o is activated.
z
When you do not use the Bluetooth function, setting [Bluetooth settings] to
[Disable] in step 1 is recommended.
448
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
Canceling the Pairing
Before pairing with a dierent BR-E1, clear the information about the
connected remote control.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [KConnect to Wireless
Remote].
3
Select [Delete connection
information].
4
Select [OK].
449
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with registered
connection settings.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
Select the item to connect to via Wi-Fi
from the displayed history. If the item is
not displayed, use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys
to switch screens.
z
If [Connection history] is set to
[Hide], the history will not be displayed
(
=
452).
3
Operate the connected device.
[q] Smartphone
z
Start Camera Connect.
z
If the smartphone’s connection destination has been changed,
restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same
access point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
450
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
[D] Computer
z
On the computer, start the EOS software.
z
If the computer’s connection destination has been changed, restore
the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access
point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
[l] Printer
z
If the printer’s connection destination has been changed, restore the
setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point
as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
451
Registering Multiple Connection Settings
You can register up to 10 connection settings for the wireless communication
functions.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
z
For details on [
q
Connect to
smartphone], see “Connecting to a
Smartphone” (
=
379).
z
For details on [
D
Remote control (EOS
Utility)], see “Connecting to a Computer
via Wi-Fi” (
=
408).
z
For details on [
l
Print from Wi-Fi
printer], see “Connecting to a Printer
via Wi-Fi” (
=
416).
z
When sending images to a Web service,
see “Sending Images to a Web Service”
(
=
426).
z
To delete connection settings, see
=
458.
452
Wi-Fi Settings
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
2
Select an item.
z
Wi-Fi
When the use of electronic devices and wireless devices is prohibited,
such as on board airplanes or in hospitals, set it to [Disable].
z
Password
Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a
password (except when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi).
z
Connection history
You can set whether to [Show] or [Hide] the history of the Wi-Fi
connected devices.
z
Auto send images to computer
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send
images on the camera to a computer automatically (
=
413).
z
Send to smartphone after shot
Your shots can be sent to a smartphone automatically (
=
394).
z
MAC address
You can check the MAC address of the camera.
453
Bluetooth Settings
1
Select [k: Bluetooth settings].
2
Select an item.
z
Bluetooth
If you will not use the Bluetooth function, select [Disable].
z
Check connection information
You can check the name and communication status of the paired device.
z
Bluetooth address
You can check the camera’s Bluetooth address.
z
Stay conn. if o
Displayed after the camera is paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth.
Selecting [Enable] lets you view images on the camera and control it in
other ways by connecting via Wi-Fi even if the camera is o (
=
387).
454
Changing the Nickname
You can change the camera nickname (displayed on smartphones and
other cameras) as needed.
1
Select [k: Nickname].
2
Enter text using the virtual
keyboard (=462).
z
When you nish entering characters,
press the <
M
> button.
455
Geotagging Images with GPS Information
from Other Devices
You can geotag images with a Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
Complete these settings after installing the dedicated Camera Connect app
(
=
380) on the smartphone.
1
On the smartphone, activate
location services.
2
Establish a Bluetooth connection.
z
Connect the camera to a smartphone
via Bluetooth (
=
381).
3
Select [k: GPS settings].
4
Set [GPS via mobile] to [Enable].
z
After these settings are complete, start
Camera Connect.
5
Take the picture.
z
Images are geotagged with the
information from the smartphone.
456
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices
GPS Connection Display
You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition in
the GPS connection icon on the screens for still photo or movie shooting
(
=
583 and
=
585, respectively).
z
Gray: Location services are o
z
Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired
z
On: Location information acquired
Geotagging images as you shoot
Images you shoot while the GPS icon is on are geotagged.
Geotagging information
You can check the location information added to your shots on the shooting
information screen (
=
304,
=
367).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Latitude
(2) Longitude
(3) Elevation
(4) UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time)
457
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices
z
The smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with the
camera via Bluetooth.
z
Direction information is not acquired.
z
Acquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling
conditions or smartphone status.
z
It may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone after
you turn the camera on.
z
Location information is no longer acquired after any of the following operations.
y
Pairing with a wireless remote control via Bluetooth
y
Turning the camera o
y
Quitting Camera Connect
y
Deactivating location services on the smartphone
z
Location information is no longer acquired in any of the following situations.
y
The camera power turns o
y
The Bluetooth connection is ended
y
The smartphone’s remaining battery level is low
z
Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
z
For movies, the GPS information initially acquired is added.
458
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
To change or delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection
rst.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
If the history (
=
449) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Edit/delete device].
z
You can change the Bluetooth
connection by selecting a smartphone
labeled with [
s
] in gray. After the
[Connect to smartphone] screen is
displayed, select [Pair via Bluetooth],
then press <
0
> on the next screen.
4
Select the device for which to
change or delete the connection
settings.
459
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
5
Select an item.
z
Change or delete the connection
settings on the displayed screen.
z
Change device nickname
You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard (
=
462).
z
Viewable imgs (
=
404)
Displayed when [
q
Connect to smartphone] is selected. Settings will
appear at the bottom of the screen.
z
Delete connection information
When deleting connection information for a paired smartphone, also
delete the camera information registered on the smartphone (
=
388).
z
For Web services, visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website to delete the
connection settings.
460
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings
to Default
All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless
communication settings, you can prevent their information from being
exposed when you lend or give your camera to other people.
1
Select [k: Clear wireless settings].
2
Select [OK].
z
Performing [
5
: Clear all camera settings] does not delete the wireless
communication setting information.
z
If you have paired the camera with a smartphone, on the smartphone’s
Bluetooth settings screen, delete the connection information of the camera for
which you restored default wireless communication settings.
461
View Info Screen
You can check error details and the camera’s MAC address.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Press the <B> button.
z
The [View info] screen will appear.
z
When an error has occurred, press <
0
> to display the error content.
462
Virtual Keyboard Operations
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (6) (7) (8)
(1) Input area, for entering text
(2) Cursor keys, for moving in the
input area
(3) Current no. of characters/no.
available
(4) Keyboard
(5) Switch input modes
(6) Space
(7) Delete a character in the input
area
(8) Finish the text entry
z
Use the <
5
> <
5
> dials or the <
V
> cross keys to move within 2 and
4–7.
z
Press <
0
> to conrm input or when switching input modes.
463
Responding to Error Messages
When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the
procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the
examples shown in this chapter.
z
On the [View info] screen, press <
0
> (
=
461).
z
Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen.
Click the error code number’s page in the following chart to jump to the
corresponding page.
11 (
=
464) 12 (
=
464) 21 (
=
465) 22 (
=
466)
23 (
=
467) 61 (
=
468) 63 (
=
469) 64 (
=
469)
65 (
=
470) 66 (
=
470) 67 (
=
470) 68 (
=
471)
69 (
=
471) 91 (
=
471) 121 (
=
471) 125 (
=
472)
126 (
=
472) 127 (
=
472) 141 (
=
472) 142 (
=
472)
151 (
=
473) 152 (
=
473)
z
When an error occurs, [Err **] is displayed on the upper right of the [Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth connection] screen. It disappears when the camera’s power is set
to <
2
>.
464
Responding to Error Messages
11: Connection target not found
z
In the case of [
q
], is Camera Connect running?
B
Establish a connection using Camera Connect (
=
392).
z
In the case of [
D
], is the EOS software running?
B
Start the EOS software and reestablish the connection (
=
410).
z
In the case of [
l
], is the power of the printer on?
B
Turn on the printer.
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
B
This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the
authentication method for encryption is set to [Open system].
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera (
=
462).
12: Connection target not found
z
Is the power of the target device and access point on?
B
Turn on the target device and access point, then wait a while.
If a connection still cannot be established, perform the procedures to
establish the connection again.
465
Responding to Error Messages
21: No address assigned by DHCP server
What to check on the camera
z
On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct
setting?
B
If no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP
address to [Manual setting] on the camera (
=
444).
What to check on the DHCP server
z
Is the power of the DHCP server on?
B
Turn on the DHCP server.
z
Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?
B
Increase the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
B
Remove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the
network to reduce the number of addresses in use.
z
Is the DHCP server working correctly?
B
Check the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DHCP server.
B
If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP
server is available.
466
Responding to Error Messages
22: No response from DNS server
What to check on the camera
z
On the camera, does the DNS server’s IP address setting match the
server’s actual address?
B
Set the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set
the IP address that matches the address of the DNS server used
(
=
444,
=
477).
What to check on the DNS server
z
Is the power of the DNS server on?
B
Turn on the DNS server.
z
Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding
names correct?
B
On the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding
names are entered correctly.
z
Is the DNS server working correctly?
B
Check the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DNS server.
B
If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS
server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
z
Does the network that you are trying to connect to via Wi-Fi include a
router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
B
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway
address and enter it on the camera (
=
444,
=
477).
B
Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on
all network devices including the camera.
467
Responding to Error Messages
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network
What to check on the camera
z
Do the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the same
network have the same IP address?
B
Change the camera’s IP address to avoid using the same address
as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address
of the device that has a duplicate address.
B
If the camera’s IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network
environments using a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto
setting] (
=
443).
Responding to Error Messages 21–23
z
Also check the following points when responding to errors numbered 21–23.
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
y
This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is set to [Open system]. The setting is case-sensitive,
so check upper- and lower-case characters. Make sure that the correct
password for authentication is set on the camera (
=
462).
468
Responding to Error Messages
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found
z
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
B
Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (
=
474).
What to check on the camera
z
Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?
B
Check the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the
camera.
What to check at the access point
z
Is the access point turned on?
B
Turn on the power of the access point.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
461).
469
Responding to Error Messages
63: Wireless LAN authentication failed
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same authentication
method?
B
The camera supports the following authentication methods:
[Open system], [Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK].
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
B
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
461).
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
B
The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
461).
470
Responding to Error Messages
65: Wireless LAN connection lost
z
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
B
Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (
=
474).
z
The Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the connection
cannot be restored.
B
The following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access
point from another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in
use nearby (interfering with IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band)), or
inuence of rain or high humidity (
=
474).
66: Incorrect wireless LAN password
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
B
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
67: Incorrect wireless LAN encryption method
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
B
The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
461).
471
Responding to Error Messages
68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the
beginning.
z
Did you hold down the access point’s WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
button for the specied period of time?
B
Hold down the WPS button for the period of time specied in the
access point’s instruction manual.
z
Are you trying to establish a connection near the access point?
B
Try establishing the connection when both devices are within reach
of each other.
69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot
connect. Retry from the beginning.
z
Connection is in progress by other access points in Pushbutton
Connection mode (PBC mode) of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
B
Wait a while before trying to establish the connection.
91: Other error
z
A problem other than error code number 11 to 69 occurred.
B
Turn the camera’s power switch o and on.
121: Not enough free space on server
z
The target Web server does not have enough free space.
B
Delete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free space
on the Web server, then try sending the data again.
472
Responding to Error Messages
125: Check the network settings
z
Is the network connected?
B
Check the connection status of the network.
126: Could not connect to server
z
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is under maintenance or load is concentrated
temporarily.
B
Try connecting to the Web service again later.
127: An error has occurred
z
A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the
camera is connected to the Web service.
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the Web service.
141: Printer is busy. Try connecting again.
z
Is the printer performing a printing process?
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
printing process is nished.
z
Is another camera connected to the printer via Wi-Fi?
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
Wi-Fi connection to the other camera has been terminated.
142: Could not acquire printer information. Reconnect to try
again.
z
Is the power of the printer on?
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection after turning on the
printer.
473
Responding to Error Messages
151: Transmission canceled
z
Automatic image transfer to the computer was somehow interrupted.
B
To resume automatic image transfer, set the camera’s power switch
to <
2
>, and then set it to <
1
>.
152: Card’s write protect switch is set to lock
z
Is the card’s write protect switch set to the locked position?
B
Slide the card’s write protect switch to the writing position.
474
Wireless Communication Function Notes
If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems
occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the following
corrective actions.
Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone
If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not
be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case,
bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi-Fi
connection.
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna
z
When using indoors, install the device in the room where you are using
the camera.
z
Install the device where people or objects do not come between the
device and the camera.
Nearby Electronic Devices
If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the inuence of the following
electronic devices, stop using them or move further away from the devices
to transmit communication.
z
The camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n using radio
waves in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission
rate will drop if there are Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless
telephones, microphones, smartphones, other cameras, or similar
devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.
475
Wireless Communication Function Notes
Cautions for Using Multiple Cameras
z
When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi, make
sure the cameras’ IP addresses are dierent.
z
When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via Wi-Fi, the
transmission rate drops.
z
When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access points,
leave a gap of ve channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio
wave interference. For example, use channels 1, 6, and 11, channels 2
and 7, or channels 3 and 8.
Using the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
z
BR-E1 cannot be used while the camera and smartphone are paired via
Bluetooth. Change the camera connection to the wireless remote control
in [
K
Connect to Wireless Remote] under [
k
: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
476
Security
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
z
Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor the Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
z
Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to thoroughly
secure your network, preventing these types of problems from occurring.
477
Checking Network Settings
z
Windows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipcong/all and press
the <Enter> key.
In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask,
gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed.
z
Mac OS
In Mac OS X, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifcong -a, and
press the <Return> key. The IP address assigned to the computer is
indicated in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
* For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the Mac OS X help.
To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on
the network, change the rightmost number when setting up the IP address
assigned to the camera in the processes described on
=
444.
Example: 192.168.1.10
478
Wireless Communication Status
Wireless communication status can be checked on the screen.
(3)
(1) (2)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) Wi-Fi function
(2) Bluetooth function
(3) Wireless signal strength
479
Wireless Communication Status
Communication status
Screen
Wi-Fi function Wireless signal strength
Not
connected
Wi-Fi: Disable
O
Wi-Fi: Enable
Connecting
(Blinking)
Connected
Sending data
(
fg
)
Connection error
(Blinking)
Bluetooth Function Indicator
Bluetooth function Connection status Screen
[Enable]
Bluetooth connected
s
Bluetooth not connected
s
[Disable] Bluetooth not connected Not displayed
z
“Bluetooth not connected” status is indicated when connected to computers,
printers, or Web services via Wi-Fi.
480
481481
Set-up
This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([
5
]) tab.
z
A
M
icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is
available only in <
t
>, <
d
>, <
s
>, <
f
>, or <
a
> mode.
482
Tab Menus: Set-up
z
Set-up 1
=
484
=
486
=
489
=
490
=
492
=
493
z
Set-up 2
=
494
=
495
=
496
=
497
=
502
=
500
=
503
z
Set-up 3
=
507
=
508
=
509
=
510
=
511
=
501
483
Tab Menus: Set-up
z
Set-up 4
=
512
=
515
=
515
=
516
=
517
=
518
z
Set-up 5
=
519
=
521
=
523
=
520
=
523
=
523
484
Select Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are
to be saved.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [5: Select folder].
2
Select [Create folder].
3
Select [OK].
485
Select Folder
Selecting a Folder
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
z
Select a folder on the folder selection
screen.
z
Captured images are stored in your
selected folder.
(1) Number of images in folder
(2) Lowest le number
(3) Folder name
(4) Highest le number
Folders
z
A folder can contain up to 9999 images (le number 0001–9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created
automatically. Also, if manual reset (
=
488) is executed, a new folder will be
created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
z
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”.
Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format “100ABC_D”.
The rst three digits are always the folder number from 100 to 999. The last ve
characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from A to Z,
numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also note that
two folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for example,
“100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining ve characters in each
name are dierent.
486
File Numbering
The captured images saved in a folder are
assigned a le number from 0001 to 9999.
You can change how the image les are
numbered.
1
Select [5: File numbering].
2
Set the item.
z
Select [Numbering].
z
Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
z
If you want to reset the le numbering,
select [Manual reset] (
=
488).
z
Select [OK] to create a new folder, and
the le number will start with 0001.
z
If the le number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even
if the card still has storage capacity. The screen will display a message telling
you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
(Example)
IMG_0001.JPG
File number
487
File Numbering
Continuous
When you wish to continue the le numbering sequence even
after the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the le numbering
continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in
multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the le numbering of the new images may continue from the le
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to use continuous le numbering, it is recommended that you use a newly-
formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
0051 0052
(1)
Card 2Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
100
0051
101
0052
Card 1
(1) Next sequential le number
488
File Numbering
Auto Reset
When you wish to restart the le numbering from 0001 each
time the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the le numbering restarts
from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to organize
images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the le numbering of the new images may continue from the le
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to save images with the le numbering starting from 0001, use a newly
formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
0051 0001
(1)
Card 2Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
100
0051
101
0001
Card 1
(1) File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
When you wish to reset the le numbering to 0001 or to start
from le number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the le numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the le numbering of images saved to that folder starts
from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use dierent folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today.
489
Auto Rotate
You can change the auto rotation setting that
straightens images shot in vertical orientation when
they are displayed.
1
Select [5: Auto rotate].
2
Select an item.
z
On
z
D
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.
z
On
D
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.
z
O
z
Images captured with auto rotation set to [O] will not rotate during playback
even if you later set auto rotation to [On].
z
If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, auto rotation to the
proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
z
If images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.
490
Format Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera.
z
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a
computer, etc. before formatting the card.
1
Select [5: Format card].
2
Format the card.
z
Select [OK].
z
For low-level formatting, press the
<
B
> button to add a checkmark
<
X
> to [Low level format], then select
[OK].
z
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the
capacity indicated on the card.
z
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
491
Format Card
Format the Card in the Following Cases:
z
The card is new.
z
The card was formatted by a dierent camera or a computer.
z
The card is full of images or data.
z
A card-related error is displayed (
=
575).
Low-Level Formatting
z
Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
z
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card,
the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
z
During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting
[Cancel]. Even in this case, normal formatting will already be complete
and you can use the card as usual.
Card’s File Formats
z
SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be
formatted in exFAT.
z
When recording a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie will
be recorded in a single le (instead of being split into multiple les) even
if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie le will exceed 4 GB.)
z
It may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera in other
cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by some
computer operating systems or card readers.
z
Formatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data.
Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of
cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.
492
Mode Guide
A brief description of the shooting mode can be displayed when you switch
shooting modes.
1
Select [5: Mode guide].
2
Select [Enable].
3
Turn the Mode dial.
z
A brief description of the selected
shooting mode is displayed.
z
To display more details, press the <
X
>
key.
z
To clear the mode guide, press <
0
>.
In <
8
>, <
U
>, or <
k
> mode, the
shooting mode selection screen is
displayed.
493
Feature Guide
A brief description of functions and items can be displayed when you use
Quick Control setting.
1
Select [5: Feature guide].
2
Select [Enable].
z
To clear a description, either tap it or continue performing operations.
494
Eco Mode
You can conserve battery power while the shooting screen is displayed.
When the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery
consumption.
1
Select [5: Eco mode].
2
Select [On].
z
If the camera is not used, the screen
dims in approx. 2 sec. and then turns o
in approx. 10 sec.
z
To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is o, press
the shutter button halfway.
495
Power Saving
You can adjust the timing of when the screen and camera turn o
automatically ([Display o] and [Auto power o]).
1
Select [5: Power saving].
2
Select an item.
z
Even when [Auto power o] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn o after
the time set in [Display o].
z
[Display o] and [Auto power o] settings do not apply when Eco mode is
set to [On].
z
[Viewnder o] is added when you are using an optional electronic viewnder,
and you can set the timing used to turn it o.
496
Display Brightness
Screen brightness is adjustable. When you use an optional electronic
viewnder, screen and viewnder brightness can be adjusted separately.
1
Select [5: Disp. brightness].
2
Make the adjustment.
z
Referring to the gray chart, use the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys to adjust the brightness, then
press <
0
>.
z
To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram is recommended
(
=
367).
497
Date/Time/Zone
When you turn on the power for the rst time or if the date/time/zone have
been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone rst.
By setting the time zone rst, you can simply adjust this setting as needed
in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and
time information, be sure to set your date/time.
1
Select [5: Date/Time/Zone].
2
Set the time zone.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
[Time zone].
z
Press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select the
time zone, then press <
0
>.
z
If your time zone is not listed, press the
<
M
> button, then set the dierence
from UTC in [Time dierence].
498
Date/Time/Zone
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
a [Time dierence] item (+/–/hour/
minute), then press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to set it, then
press <
0
>.
z
After entering the time zone or time
dierence, use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to
select [OK], then press <
0
>.
3
Set the date and time.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
item, then press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to set it, then
press <
0
>.
4
Set the daylight saving time.
z
Set it as necessary.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [
Y
],
then press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select [
Z
],
then press <
0
>.
z
When the daylight saving time is set to
[
Z
], the time set in step 3 will advance
by 1 hour. If [
Y
] is set, the daylight
saving time will be canceled and the
time will go back by 1 hour.
5
Exit the setting.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [OK].
499
Date/Time/Zone
z
The date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is exposed
to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this happens, set
them once again.
z
After changing [Zone/Time dierence], check that the correct date/time
are set.
z
Auto power o time may be extended while the [
5
: Date/Time/Zone] screen is
displayed.
500
Language
1
Select [5: LanguageK].
2
Set the desired language.
501
Focus Mode Switch (AF/MF)
You can enable or disable switching between manual focus and autofocus
using the focus mode switch of attached EF-M lenses.
1
Select [5: switch (AF/MF)].
2
Select an item.
z
Enable
The focus mode switch applies instead
of the [
z
: Focus mode] menu setting.
z
Disable
The [
z
: Focus mode] menu setting
applies instead of the focus mode
switch, which is deactivated.
502
Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the frame rates available when you record movies.
1
Select [5: Video system].
2
Select an item.
z
For NTSC
For areas where the TV system is NTSC
(North America, Japan, South Korea,
Mexico, etc.).
z
For PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL
(Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
503
Sensor Cleaning
The camera’s sensor cleaning feature cleans the front of the image sensor.
Activating Immediate Cleaning
1
Select [5: Sensor cleaning].
2
Select [Clean nowf].
z
Select [OK] on the conrmation dialog.
504
Sensor Cleaning
Setting Auto Cleaning
1
Select [Auto cleaningf].
2
Select an item.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
item, then press <
0
>.
z
For best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or other
at surface.
z
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Note that [Clean now
f
] may not be available immediately after cleaning.
z
Dots of light may appear in captured images or on the shooting screen
if the sensor is aected by cosmic rays or similar factors. By selecting
[Clean now
f
], their appearance may be suppressed (
=
503).
505
Sensor Cleaning
Manual Sensor Cleaning
Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed
manually with a commercially available blower or similar tool.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned
directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
1
Set the power switch to <2>.
2
Remove the lens and clean
the sensor.
3
End the cleaning.
z
Attach the lens or body cap.
506
Sensor Cleaning
z
During sensor cleaning, never set the power switch to <
1
>. This will
cause the shutter to move, which may damage the image sensor or
shutter curtains.
z
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with
care.
z
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor.
z
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. This may
damage the shutter curtains.
z
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air may
damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and scratch it.
z
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor
cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
507
Touch Control
1
Select [5: Touch control].
2
Select an item.
z
[Standard] is the normal setting.
z
[Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch-screen panel response than
[Standard].
z
To disable touch operations, select
[Disable].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
z
Do not use sharp objects such as ngernails or ballpoint pens for touch
operations.
z
Do not use wet ngers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or
if your ngers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction
may occur. In this case, turn o the power and wipe o the moisture with
a cloth.
z
Attaching any commercially available protective sheet or sticker on the screen
may degrade the touch operation response.
z
If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
operation response may be poor.
508
Beeping
You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other operations.
1
Select [5: Beep].
2
Select an item.
Touch
The beeper will be silent only for touch
operations.
Disable
Disables beeping when subjects are in
focus, when you shoot with the self-timer,
and when you use touch operations.
509
HDMI Resolution
Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a
television or external recording device with an HDMI cable.
1
Select [5: HDMI resolution].
2
Select an item.
Auto
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you
prefer to avoid display or delay issues
when the camera switches resolution.
510
HDMI HDR Output
You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR
TV.
1
Select [5: HDMI HDR output].
2
Select [On].
z
Image operations such as RAW processing are not available during HDR
display.
z
Make sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch
inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual.
z
Depending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.
z
Some image eects and information may not be displayed on an HDR TV.
511
Shutter Button Function for Movies
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway
or completely during movie recording.
1
Select [5: Shutter btn function for
movies].
2
Select an item.
z
Half-press
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway.
z
Fully-press
This item is displayed when the Mode
dial is set to <
k
>.
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button completely.
With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie
recording not only by pressing the movie shooting button but also by
pressing the shutter button completely or by using Remote Switch RS-60E3
(sold separately,
=
223).
z
Even if you set [Fully-press] to [No function], the camera will start or stop
recording time-lapse movies if the shutter button is pressed completely when
the camera is set up for time-lapse movies.
512
Shooting Information Display
You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the
camera when you shoot.
Select [5: Shooting info. disp.].
Customizing Information on the Screen
1
Select [Screen info. settings].
2
Select screens.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select
screens of information to show on the
camera.
z
For information you prefer not to
display, press <
0
> to clear the
checkmark [
X
].
z
To edit the screen, press the <
B
>
button.
513
Shooting Information Display
3
Edit the screen.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select items
to show on the screen.
z
For items you prefer not to display, press
<
0
> to clear the checkmark [
X
].
z
Select [OK] to register the setting.
Conguring Display of an Optional Electronic Viewnder
z
In step 1, select [
5
: VF info/toggle settings].
z
In [
5
: VF vertical display], you can select how information is displayed in
vertical still photo shooting.
Grid Display
1
Select [Grid display].
2
Select an item.
514
Shooting Information Display
Setting the Histogram
1
Select [Histogram disp].
2
Select an item.
z
Select the content ([Brightness] or
[RGB]) and display size ([Large] or
[Small]).
z
Press <
M
> button to conrm the
setting.
Clearing Settings
1
Select [Reset].
2
Select [OK].
515
Display Performance
You can specify smooth display or power saving display in still photo
shooting.
1
Select [5: Disp. performance].
2
Select an item.
Viewfinder Display Format
When using an optional electronic viewnder, you can select the viewnder
display format.
1
Select [5: VF display format].
2
Select an item.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select an
item.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
516
Display Settings
When using an optional electronic viewnder, you can select the display
mode for shooting screens.
1
Select [5: Display settings].
2
Select an item.
z
Auto
Normally use the screen for display, but
switch to the viewnder when you look
through it.
z
Manual
You can restrict display to the screen or
viewnder.
3
Select screen or viewnder display.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
517
Reverse Display
A mirror image can be displayed when you shoot with the screen rotated
toward the subject (toward the front of the camera).
1
Select [5: Reverse display].
2
Select [On].
z
Select [O] if you prefer not to reverse
display when the screen is rotated
toward the front.
518
Help Features
When [
z
Help] is displayed below a menu, you can display a description
about the feature by pressing the <
B
> button. Press it again to exit Help
display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1) appears on the right, press
the <
W
> <
X
> keys or turn the <
5
> dial.
z
Example: [
z
: High ISO speed NR]
<
B
>
B
(1)
Help Display Text Size
You can change the text size for the Help display.
1
Select [5: Help text size].
2
Select an item.
519
M
Custom Shooting Modes (C1/C2)
Current camera settings such as shooting, menu, and Custom Function
settings can be registered as Custom shooting modes.
1
Select [5: Custom shooting mode
(C1, C2)].
2
Select [Register settings].
3
Register the desired items.
z
On the [Register settings] screen,
select [Custom shooting mode: C*],
then press <
0
>.
z
Select [OK] on the [Custom shooting
mode: C*] screen.
The current camera settings are
registered to Custom shooting mode C*.
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
If you change a setting while shooting in Custom shooting mode, the mode
can be automatically updated with the new setting (Auto update). To enable
this automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of respective modes
can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes
registered.
z
You can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting modes.
520
M
Reset Camera
You can restore default camera settings in <
t
> <
d
> <
s
> <
f
> <
a
>
<
k
> modes.
1
Select [5: Reset camera].
2
Select [Basic settings].
z
To clear other settings, select [Other
settings], then select an item.
3
Select [OK].
z
Custom Function (C.Fn) and customized control settings are also reset with
“Clearing Custom Function Settings” (
=
542).
z
Basic settings such as [Language
K
] and [Date/Time/Zone] are not restored
to defaults.
521
M
Copyright Information
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as
Exif information.
1
Select [5: Copyright information].
2
Select an item.
3
Enter text.
z
Use the <
V
> cross keys or <
5
> dial
to select a character, then press <
0
>
to enter it.
z
By selecting [
], you can change the
input mode.
z
To delete the previous character, select
[
] and press <
0
>.
4
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button, then press
[OK].
522
Copyright Information
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright info.]
in step 2, you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete
the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
z
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely
when you select [Display copyright info.].
z
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(EOS software).
523
Other Information
z
Manual/software URL
To download instruction manuals, select [
5
: Manual/software URL] and
scan the displayed QR code with a smartphone.
You can also use a computer to access the website at the URL displayed
and download software.
z
Certication Logo Display
M
Select [
5
: Certication Logo Display] to display some of the logos of
the camera’s certications. Other certication logos can be found in this
Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.
z
Firmware
M
Select [
5
: Firmware] to update the rmware of the camera or current
lens.
524
525525
Custom Functions /
My Menu
You can ne-tune camera functions and change the functionality of
buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences. You can also
add menu items and Custom Functions that you adjust frequently
to My Menu tabs.
526
Tab Menus: Customization
=
528
=
532
=
534
=
542
=
542
527
M
Setting Custom Functions
1
Select [C.Fn I:Exposure], [C.Fn II:
Autofocus], or [C.Fn III:Operation/
Others].
(1)
2
Select a Custom Function number.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
Custom Function number (1) to set up.
3
Change the setting as desired.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select a
setting (number).
z
To set up another Custom Function,
repeat steps 2–3.
z
At the bottom of the screen, the current
Custom Function settings are indicated
below the respective function numbers.
z
Any options changed from defaults are
displayed in blue.
4
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
z
The screen in step 1 is displayed again.
528
M
Custom Function Setting Items
You can customize camera features on the [
8
] tab to suit your shooting
preferences.
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, ash exposure compensation, etc.
z
0: 1/3-stop
z
1: 1/2-stop
z
When [1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below.
C.Fn I-2: ISO speed setting increments
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to a whole-stop.
z
0: 1/3-stop
z
1: 1-stop
z
Even if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when ISO Auto is set.
529
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn I-3: Bracketing auto cancel
You can specify to cancel AEB and white balance bracketing when the
power switch is set to <
2
>.
z
0: Enable
z
1: Disable
C.Fn I-4: Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can
be changed.
z
0: 0,
–
, +
z
1:
–
, 0, +
z
2: +, 0,
–
AEB
White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction M/G Direction
0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
– : Underexposure – : Blue bias – : Magenta bias
+ : Overexposure + : Amber bias + : Green bias
530
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn I-5: Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be
changed.
When [Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, –, +], the bracketed shots will be
taken as shown in the table below.
z
0: 3 shots
z
1: 2 shots
z
2: 5 shots
z
3: 7 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
1st Shot 2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot
3: 3 shots Standard (0) –1 +1
2: 2 shots Standard (0) ±1
5: 5 shots Standard (0) –2 –1 +1 +2
7: 7 shots Standard (0) –3 –2 –1 +1 +2 +3
z
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or – side when setting the AEB range.
With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward either the B/A or M/G
direction.
531
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn I-6: Safety shift
If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be
obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically
change the manually selected setting to obtain the standard exposure.
When set to [Shutter speed/Aperture], this setting applies to <
s
> and
<
f
> modes. When set to [ISO speed], this setting applies to <
d
>,
<
s
>, and <
f
> modes.
z
0: Disable
z
1: Shutter speed/Aperture
z
2: ISO speed
z
Under [
z
:
z
ISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will override it if
the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
z
The minimum and maximum limits for the safety shift with the ISO speed are
determined by [Auto range] (
=
146). However, if the manually set ISO speed
exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift will take eect up or down to the
manually set ISO speed.
z
Safety shift will take eect as necessary even when ash is used.
C.Fn I-7: AE lock metering mode after focus
For each metering mode, you can specify
whether to lock the exposure (AE lock)
once subjects are in focus with One-Shot
AF. The exposure will be locked while you
keep pressing the shutter button halfway.
Select metering modes for AE lock and add
a checkmark [
X
]. Select [OK] to register
the setting.
532
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn II: Autofocus
C.Fn II-1: Limit AF methods
You can limit the AF methods available to
those that you will use.
For details on AF methods,
see
=
198–
=
200.
Add a checkmark [
X
] to the AF methods
to make available. Select [OK] to register
the setting.
z
The [
X
] mark cannot be removed from [1-point AF].
C.Fn II-2: Orientation linked AF point
You can assign AF points or Zone AF frames to dierent positions based on
whether you are shooting vertically or horizontally.
z
0: Same for both vertic./horiz.
AF points or Zone AF frames in the same position are used for both
vertical and horizontal shooting.
z
1: Separate AF pts: pt only
Separate AF point or Zone AF frame positions can be assigned for
each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip
above, 3. Vertical with the camera grip below). Useful when switching to
AF points or Zone AF frames in other positions automatically based on
camera orientation.
AF points or Zone AF frames assigned to each of the three camera
orientations are retained.
533
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn II-3: Initial Servo AF pt for
c
You can set the initial AF point for Servo AF when the AF method is set to
[
u
+Tracking].
z
0: Auto
The initial AF point of Servo AF for [
u
+Tracking] is set automatically to
suit the shooting conditions.
z
1: Initial AF pt set for
c
Servo AF starts from the manually set AF point when AF operation is set
to [Servo AF] and the AF method is set to [
u
+Tracking].
z
2: AF pt set for
If you switch from [Spot AF] or [1-point AF] to [
u
+Tracking], Servo AF
starts from the AF point that was manually set before switching.
Useful for starting Servo AF from the AF point set before switching to
[
u
+Tracking].
534
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
C.Fn III-1: Dial direction during Tv/Av
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be
reversed.
In the <
a
> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <
6
> and <
5
>
dial will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning direction of only
the <
6
> dial will be reversed. The direction of the <
5
> dial in <
a
>
mode matches the direction to set exposure compensation in <
d
>, <
s
>,
and <
f
> modes.
z
0: Normal
z
1: Reverse direction
535
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn III-2: Customize buttons
You can assign frequently used functions to buttons, such as <
V
> or
<
B
>.
Dierent functions, for use when shooting still photos or movies, can be
assigned to the same button.
1
Select a part of the bar.
2
Select a function to assign.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
536
Custom Function Setting Items
Functions Available for Buttons
Function
L
AF
Metering and AF start
k k k
AF stop
k k
AF point selection
k k
Direct AF point selection
Set AF point to center
k k
One-Shot AF
z
Servo AF*
1
k k
AF method*
1
k k
Touch & drag AF
k k
Eye Detection AF*
1
k k
Peaking
k k
Exposure
AE lock
k k
AE lock (hold)
k k
AE lock (while button pressed)
k
AE lock/FE lock*
1
k k
O
Exposure compensation
k k
g
ISO speed
k k
Metering start*
1
k
Metering mode*
1
k k
Flash function settings*
1
k k
Flash ring*
1
k k
FE lock*
1
k k
Movies
k
Movie recording
k k
Pause Movie Servo AF
k k
537
Custom Function Setting Items
k k k
k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k
k k k
k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k
k k k
k k k k k k k k k
538
Custom Function Setting Items
Function
L
Press buttons directly
Dial function settings
k k
Depth-of-eld preview*
1
k k
Reset selected item in Fv mode*
1
k k
Reset Tv/Av/ /ISO in Fv mode*
1
k k
Q
Quick Control screen
k k
Magnify/Reduce
k k
Menu
Menu display
k k
Image quality*
1
k k
Still image aspect ratio*
1
k k
Drive mode*
1
k k
Auto Lighting Optimizer
k k
Picture Style
k k
Touch Shutter*
1
k k
RAW burst mode*
1
k k
Select folder
k k
Create folder*
1
k k
Maximize screen brightness (temporary)
k k
Display o
k k
Eco mode
k k
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection
k k
No function (disabled)
k k
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available when recording movies.
539
Custom Function Setting Items
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k
540
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn III-3: Customize dials
You can assign frequently used functions to dials, such as <
5
>, <
6
>,
or <
5
>.
1
Select a part of the bar.
2
Select a function to assign.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
Functions Available for Dials
Function
6 5
5
Shutter speed setting in M mode
k k
Aperture setting in M mode
k k
Change aperture value
k
Change shutter speed
k
Set ISO speed
k
Exposure compensation
k
No function (disabled)
k k k
541
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn III-4: Release shutter without lens
You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without
a lens attached to the camera.
z
0: Disable
z
1: Enable
C.Fn III-5: Retract lens on power o
Lens retraction setting for gear-driven EF or EF-S STM lenses (such as EF
40mm f/2.8 STM) attached to the camera. You can specify whether to retract
lenses that are extended in use automatically when you turn the camera o.
z
0: Enable
z
1: Disable
z
Retraction is not activated by auto power o (except for EF-M lenses).
z
Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
z
When [0:Enable] is set, this function takes eect regardless of the lens’s focus
mode switch setting (AF or MF).
542
Clearing Custom Function Settings
z
Clearing all Custom Function settings
By selecting [
8
: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)], you can clear
all Custom Function settings other than [Customize buttons] and
[Customize dials] settings.
z
Clearing [Customize buttons] and [Customize dials] settings
By selecting [
8
: Clear customized settings], you can clear [Customize
buttons] and [Customize dials] settings.
543
Tab Menus: My Menu
=
544
=
547
=
547
=
548
544
M
Registering My Menu
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions
whose settings you change frequently.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1
Select [Add My Menu tab].
2
Select [OK].
z
You can create up to ve My Menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1
Select [9: Congure].
545
Registering My Menu
2
Select [Select items to register].
3
Register the desired items.
z
Select the item to be set, then press
<
0
>.
z
Select [OK] on the conrmation dialog.
z
You can register up to six items.
z
To return to the screen in step 2, press
the <
M
> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under
the menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
z
Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu.
Select [Sort registered items], select an item to rearrange, then press
<
0
>. With [
z
] displayed, use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to move the item,
then press <
0
>.
z
Delete selected items/Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the
registered items under the tab.
546
Registering My Menu
z
Delete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete
the [MY MENU*] tab.
z
Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1
Select [Rename tab].
2
Enter text.
z
Select [
] to delete any unnecessary
characters.
z
Use the <
V
> cross keys or <
5
> dial
to select a character, then press <
0
>.
z
By selecting [
], you can change the
input mode.
3
Conrm input.
z
Press the <
M
> button, then press
[OK].
547
Registering My Menu
Deleting all My Menu tabs/Deleting all items
You can delete all the created My Menu
tabs or My Menu items registered under
them.
z
Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete
all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will
be deleted and the [
9
] tab will revert to its default.
z
Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items]
is selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be
deleted.
z
If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed
with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
548
Registering My Menu
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear rst when
you press the <
M
> button.
z
Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
z
Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [
9
] tab selected.
z
Display only My Menu tab
Only the [
9
] tab is displayed. (The [
z
], [
3
], [
k
], [
5
], and [
8
] tabs
will not be displayed.)
549549
Reference
This chapter provides reference information on camera features.
550
Software
Downloading and Installing the EOS Software or Other
Dedicated Software
Always install the latest version of the software.
Update any previous versions that are installed by overwriting them with the
latest version.
z
Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software.
The software will not be installed correctly.
z
The software cannot be installed unless the computer is connected to
the Internet.
z
Previous versions cannot display images from this camera correctly.
Also, processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.
1
Download the software.
z
Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following
Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
z
Enter the serial number on the back of the screen, then download
the software.
z
Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows
Click the displayed installer le to start the installer.
For Macintosh
A dmg le will be created and displayed. Follow the steps below to
startup the installer.
551
Software
(1) Double-click the dmg le.
B
A drive icon and installer le will appear on the desktop.
If the installer le does not appear, double-click the drive icon
to display it.
(2) Double-click the installer le.
B
The installer starts.
2
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals (PDF les) can be downloaded from the
Canon website to your computer.
z
Software Instruction Manual Download Site
www.canon.com/icpd
z
To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF les), an Adobe PDF viewing
software such as Adobe Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version
recommended) is required.
z
Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
z
Double-click the downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF le) to open it.
z
To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section
or the like.
552
Importing Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer.
There are three ways to do this.
Connecting to a Computer via an Interface Cable
1
Install the software (=550).
2
Connect the camera to the
computer with Interface Cable
IFC-100U (sold separately;
computer end: USB Type-C).
z
Insert the cord’s plug into the camera’s
digital terminal.
z
Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
3
Use EOS Utility to import the
images.
z
Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
z
With Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer even if they are connected with an interface cable.
553
Importing Images to a Computer
Card Reader
You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.
1
Install the software (=550).
2
Insert the card into the card reader.
3
Use Digital Photo Professional to
import the images.
z
Refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
z
When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card reader
without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the computer.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
You can connect the camera to the computer via Wi-Fi and import images to
the computer (
=
408).
554
In-Camera Charging
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 (sold separately), you can charge Battery
Pack LP-E17 without removing it from the camera. Charging stops if you
operate the camera.
1
Connect the USB power adapter.
z
With the camera’s power switch set to
<
2
>, insert the USB power adapter
plug fully into the digital terminal.
2
Connect the power cord.
z
Connect the power cord to the USB
power adapter and plug the other end
into a power outlet.
z
Charging begins, and the access lamp
(1) is lit in orange.
(
1
)
z
When charging is nished, the access
lamp turns o. Unplug the power cord
and disconnect the USB power adapter
from the camera.
z
To protect batteries and keep them in optimal condition, do not charge
continuously for more than 24 hours.
z
In case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in orange and a
protective circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord, reattach
the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem
persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
555
Household Power Outlet Accessory
z
If the access lamp does not light up, try unplugging the USB power adapter and
plugging it in again.
z
The charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on
ambient temperature and remaining capacity.
z
For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (0–10°C / 41–50°F) will
take longer.
z
Batteries are not charged when the camera is connected via Wi-Fi or when the
card slot/battery compartment cover is open.
Household Power Outlet Accessory
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E17 and Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700 (each sold
separately). For instructions on attachment and use, refer to the DR-E17
and CA-PS700 instruction manuals.
z
Do not use an AC adapter other than the Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700.
z
While the camera’s power switch is on, do not connect or disconnect the power
cord or connector or do not disconnect the DC coupler.
z
After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
556
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, rst refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact
your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
Batteries cannot be charged with the charger.
z
Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E17.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
z
If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication
with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery), the protection circuit
will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange. In the case of
(1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the power outlet. Detach and
reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few minutes, then reconnect
the power plug to the power outlet. If the problem persists, contact your
dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
z
If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp
o). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for any
reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery
temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
557
Troubleshooting Guide
Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter
(sold separately).
z
Batteries are not charged while the camera’s power switch is set to
<
1
>.
z
Operating the camera will stop charging in progress.
The access lamp blinks during charging with the USB power
adapter.
z
In case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and a
protective circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord,
reattach the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again.
If the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service
Center.
The access lamp is not lit during charging with the USB power
adapter.
z
Try unplugging the USB power adapter and plugging it in again.
The camera is not activated even when the power switch is set
to <
1
>.
z
Make sure the card slot/battery compartment cover is closed (
=
42).
z
Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (
=
42).
z
Charge the battery (
=
40).
The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power
switch is set to <
2
>.
z
If the power is turned o while an image is being recorded to the card, the
access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When
the image recording is complete, the power will turn o automatically.
558
Troubleshooting Guide
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is
displayed.
z
Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E17.
z
Remove and install the battery again (
=
42).
z
If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
z
Use a fully charged battery (
=
40).
z
The battery performance may have degraded. If the battery performance
is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
z
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
z
Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
z
Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
z
Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
z
Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (wireless communication) function.
The camera turns o by itself.
z
Auto power o is in eect. To deactivate auto power o, set [Auto power
o] under [
5
: Power saving] to [Disable] (
=
495).
z
Even if [Auto power o] is set to [Disable], the screen will still turn
o after the camera is left idle for the time set in [Display o], but the
camera will remain on.
z
Set [
5
: Eco mode] to [O].
559
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
z
To attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera
cannot be used with RF lenses.
No images can be shot or recorded.
z
Make sure the card is properly inserted (
=
42).
z
Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (
=
42).
z
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make
space (
=
42,
=
327).
z
Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to
focus. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or
focus manually (
=
58,
=
218).
The card cannot be used.
z
If a card error message is displayed, see
=
45 or
=
575.
An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in
another camera.
z
Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this
camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed
and it may not be possible to use the card.
560
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus or blurred.
z
Switch to AF focus mode (
=
7,
=
52).
z
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (
=
58).
z
With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <
1
>.
z
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (
=
106), set a higher ISO speed (
=
143), use ash (
=
283),
or use a tripod.
z
See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on
=
73.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
z
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Shooting with the focus locked is
not possible with Servo AF (
=
74).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
z
The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous shooting
may be lower, depending on conditions such as these: battery level,
temperature, icker reduction, shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of ash, and
shooting settings (
=
134).
561
Troubleshooting Guide
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
z
If you shoot a subject that has ne detail such as a eld of grass, the le
size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the
number listed on
=
577.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.
z
The maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch cards,
even if you switch to a high-speed card. The maximum burst shown in
the table on
=
577 is based on Canon’s testing card. (The faster the
card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum burst will be.) For
this reason, the maximum burst displayed may dier from the actual
maximum burst.
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image
comes out bright.
z
Set [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (
=
149). When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or ash exposure compensation, the image may come out
bright.
I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual
exposure and ISO Auto are set.
z
See
=
111 to set the exposure compensation.
The image ickers or horizontal stripes appear during shooting.
z
Horizontal banding noise may appear in still photos or movies recorded
at high ISO speeds with an EF-M 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens
attached.
If horizontal banding noise occurs, either lower the ISO speed or set a
lower maximum limit for ISO Auto.
562
Troubleshooting Guide
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
z
Although [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diraction correction] are
not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], both
functions are applied in shooting, as when set to [Enable].
z
During movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] and [Diraction
correction] will not be displayed.
Using ash in <
f
> or <
d
> mode lowers the shutter speed.
z
Under [
z
: Flash control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto]
or [1/200 sec. (xed)] (
=
291).
The ash does not re.
z
Make sure any external Speedlites are securely attached to the camera.
z
Shooting with the ash may be temporarily disabled to protect the ash
head if the built-in ash is used repeatedly over a short period.
The ash always res at full output.
z
Flash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoash mode
always re at full output (
=
300).
z
When the ash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is
set to [TTL ash metering] (autoash), the ash will always re at full
output (
=
298).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
z
If ash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, ash
exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s ash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0),
ash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
563
Troubleshooting Guide
The specied exposure changes when I shoot with ISO Auto
using ash.
z
When there is a risk of overexposure in ash photography, shutter
speed or ISO speed is automatically adjusted to reduce loss of detail in
highlights and shoot at standard exposure. In ash shots with certain
lenses, shutter speeds and ISO speeds displayed when you press the
shutter button halfway may not match the actual settings used. This may
alter the brightness of backgrounds that are out of ash range.
z
To avoid shooting at dierent shutter speeds or ISO speeds than
displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in <
d
>, <
s
>,
<
f
>, <
a
>, or <
t
> mode, shoot with a manually set ISO speed.
Remote control shooting is not possible.
z
When taking still photos with a wireless remote control, set the drive
mode to [
Q
] or [
k
] (
=
135). When recording movies, set
[
z
: Remote control] to [Enable] (
=
276).
z
Check the position of the remote control’s release timing switch.
z
If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see
=
223,
=
446.
z
To use a remote control for time-lapse movie recording, see
=
260.
A white
s
or red
E
icon is displayed during shooting.
z
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. Image quality
of still photos may be worse when a white [
s
] icon is displayed. If the
red [
E
] icon is displayed, it indicates that the shooting will soon stop
automatically (
=
224).
564
Troubleshooting Guide
During movie recording, the red
E
icon is displayed.
z
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red [
E
]
icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie recording will soon stop
automatically (
=
280).
Movie recording stops by itself.
z
If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see
=
579. To nd out
the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website, etc.
z
If you shoot a movie for 29 min. 59 sec., the movie recording will stop
automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.
z
In shooting modes other than [
M
], the ISO speed is set automatically.
In [
M
] mode, you can manually set the ISO speed (
=
277,
=
581).
ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot be
selected during movie recording.
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the minimum ISO
speed is ISO 200.
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], H (expanded ISO
speed) is not available.
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], you can set ISO
100/125/160 or H (expanded ISO speed).
565
Troubleshooting Guide
[
F
] is displayed.
z
[
F
] may be displayed after repeated movie recording under the following
settings, or if you keep the camera standing by for movie recording over
extended periods.
z
4K movie recording
z
High Frame Rate movie recording
z
Movie recording while connected via Wi-Fi
z
The camera turns o automatically in approx. 3 min. if you continue
recording while [
F
] is displayed. The camera may also turn o
automatically while standing by for movie recording when [
F
] is
displayed.
z
Turn o the camera when [
F
] is displayed, and wait to allow the camera
to cool down.
The exposure changes during movie recording.
z
If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie recording, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
z
Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may
cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven
audio level, or loss of focus.
The image ickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie
recording.
z
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by uorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during
movie recording. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone may be recorded. In [
M
] mode, a slow shutter speed may reduce
the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie
recording.
566
Troubleshooting Guide
The subject looks distorted during movie recording.
z
If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie recording.
I cannot take still photos during movie recording.
z
Still photos cannot be taken during movie recording. Before taking still
photos, stop recording the movie, then select a shooting mode for still
photos.
567
Troubleshooting Guide
Problems with Wireless Features
Cannot pair with a smartphone.
z
Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specication Version 4.1
or later.
z
Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.
z
Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen. Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of
charge) on the smartphone (
=
380).
z
A previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera again
if the camera’s registration is retained on the smartphone. In this case,
remove the camera’s registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on
the smartphone and try pairing again (
=
388).
Wi-Fi function cannot be set.
z
If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an
interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface
cable before setting any functions (
=
376).
A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.
z
Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected
to devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection before connecting
the interface cable.
Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and
playback may not be possible.
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.
568
Troubleshooting Guide
Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.
z
Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you
have changed the settings or selected a dierent setting, reconnection
may not be established even after selecting the same SSID. In this case,
delete the camera connection settings from the Wi-Fi settings on the
smartphone and set up a connection again.
z
A connection may not be established if Camera Connect is running when
you recongure connection settings. In this case, quit Camera Connect
for a moment and then restart it.
Operation Problems
Touch operation is not possible.
z
Make sure [
5
: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(
=
507).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
z
For movie recording, check the [
5
: Shutter btn function for movies]
setting (
=
511).
z
Check [
8
: C.Fn III-2: Customize buttons] and [
8
: C.Fn III-3:
Customize dials] settings (
=
535,
=
540).
569
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.
z
In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and items are not displayed. Tabs and
items on the menu screen also vary for still photos and movies.
The display starts with [
9
] My Menu, or the [
9
] tab alone is
displayed.
z
[Menu display] on the [
9
] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or
[Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (
=
548).
The le name’s rst character is an underscore (“_”).
z
Set [
z
: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the rst
character will be an underscore (
=
162).
The le name starts with “MVI_”.
z
It is a movie le.
The le numbering does not start from 0001.
z
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (
=
486).
570
Troubleshooting Guide
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
z
Make sure the correct date and time are set (
=
497).
z
Check the time zone and daylight saving time (
=
497).
The date and time are not in the image.
z
The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the date
and time recorded in the shooting information (
=
331).
[###] is displayed.
z
If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed.
The screen does not display a clear image.
z
If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
z
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
571
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
z
[
3
: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (
=
369).
A red box is displayed on the image.
z
[
3
: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (
=
370).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
z
The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are
played back:
z
Images taken in the <
8
:
F
G
> modes.
z
Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.
z
Cropped images.
z
Images captured with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable] in HDR
shooting.
The image cannot be erased.
z
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (
=
323).
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
z
The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another
camera.
z
Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Only few images can be played back.
z
The images have been ltered for playback with [
3
: Set image search
conditions] (
=
363). Clear the image search conditions.
572
Troubleshooting Guide
Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during
movie playback.
z
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie recording, the
operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (
=
249).
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
z
If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure
movie recording, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. In this case, shoot in the [
M
] mode (
=
234).
No picture appears on the television.
z
Make sure [
5
: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL]
correctly for the video system of your television (
=
502).
z
Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (
=
321).
There are multiple movie les for a single movie recording.
z
If the movie le size reaches 4 GB, another movie le will be created
automatically (
=
246). However, if you use an SDXC card formatted
with the camera, you can record a movie in a single le even if it exceeds
4 GB.
573
Troubleshooting Guide
My card reader does not recognize the card.
z
Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating
system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In this case,
connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable, then
import the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software).
The image cannot be resized.
z
With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG
b
and RAW images
(
=
356).
The image cannot be cropped.
z
With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (
=
354).
Dots of light appear on the image.
z
White, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images or on the
shooting screen if the sensor is aected by cosmic rays or similar factors.
Their appearance may be reduced by performing [Clean now
f
] under
[
5
: Sensor cleaning] (
=
503).
574
Troubleshooting Guide
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
z
Under [
5
: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean now
f
], the
shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but no picture
will be recorded to the card (
=
174,
=
503).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
z
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <
1
> and <
2
> within a short
time period, the [
f
] icon may not be displayed (
=
47).
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot import images to a computer.
z
Install EOS Utility (EOS software) in the computer (
=
550).
z
If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate with
any computer connected with an interface cable.
Communication between the connected camera and computer
does not work.
z
When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [
z
: Time-lapse movie] to
[Disable] (
=
250).
575
Error Codes
(2)
(1)
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the
on-screen instructions. If the problem
persists, write down the error code (Err xx)
and contact a Canon Service Center.
(1) Error number
(2) Cause and countermeasures
576
Performance Data
Still Photo Shooting
z
Number of Possible Shots
Approx. 305 shots (at a room temperature of 23°C/73°F)
• Based on using the screen and a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17, and following
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
z
ISO Auto Range
Shooting Mode
ISO Speed
No Flash With Flash
t
/
d
/
s
/
f
/
a
ISO 100–25600* ISO 100–1600*
* The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum] set with
[Auto range].
• In Basic Zone modes, ISO speed is set automatically.
• For bulb exposure, the value is automatically set to ISO 400.
577
Performance Data
z
Guide to Image Quality Settings
(Approx.)
Image
Quality
Pixels
Recorded
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
Maximum Burst
Standard High Speed
JPEG
73
32M
11.1 2720 54 54
83
5.6 5380 54 54
74
15M
5.8 5190 54 54
84
3.0 9860 54 54
7
a
8.1M
3.6 8390 54 54
8
a
2.0 14600 54 54
b
3.8M 1.6 18390 54 54
RAW
1
32M 35.6 850 23 23
F
32M 20.4 1490 34 36
RAW+JPEG
1
73
32M
32M
35.6+11.1 650 23 23
F
73
32M
32M
20.4+11.1 960 34 36
• The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an 32 GB
card.
• Maximum burst measured under conditions and with an SD card conforming to Canon
testing standards (standard: 32 GB/high speed: 32 GB UHS-II card, set to [
o
]
high-speed continuous shooting, 3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100, Standard Picture Style).
• The le size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst will vary depending
on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom
Functions, and other settings.
z
Even if you use a high-speed SD card, maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in the table will apply instead.
578
Performance Data
z
Pixel Count at Specic Aspect Ratios
(Approx. pixels)
Image Quality 3:2 4:3
1
/
F
6960×4640 (32.3 megapixels) 6960×4640 (32.3 megapixels)
3
6960×4640 (32.3 megapixels) 6160×4640* (28.6 megapixels)
a
4800×3200 (15.4 megapixels) 4256×3200* (13.6 megapixels)
a
3472×2320* (8.1 megapixels) 3072×2320* (7.1 megapixels)
b
2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels) 2112×1600* (3.4 megapixels)
Image Quality 16:9 1:1
1
/
F
6960×4640 (32.3 megapixels) 6960×4640 (32.3 megapixels)
3
6960×3904* (27.2 megapixels) 4640×4640 (21.5 megapixels)
a
4800×2688* (12.9 megapixels) 3200×3200 (10.2 megapixels)
a
3472×1952* (6.8 megapixels) 2320×2320 (5.4 megapixels)
b
2400×1344* (3.2 megapixels) 1600×1600 (2.6 megapixels)
z
The image area displayed for the asterisked “*” aspect ratio may be slightly
dierent from the actual image area. Check the captured images on the LCD
monitor during shooting.
z
The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
dier from the aspect ratio indicated.
z
For details on JPEG le sizes, see the values on
=
577. Under equivalent
shooting conditions, le sizes will be smaller than when [
z
: Still img aspect
ratio] is set to [3:2].
579
Performance Data
Movie Recording
z
Cards that Can Record Movies
Movie Recording Size SD Card
H
65 X
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
L
23
X
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
87 X
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
65 X
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
HDR movie
65 V
w 87 X
• When [
k
Digital IS] is disabled.
• This table indicates the card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording
movies (card performance requirements).
580
Performance Data
z
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
(Approx.)
Movie Recording Size
Total Possible Recording Time on Card
File Size
8 GB 32 GB 128 GB
H
65 X
8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 21 min. 860 MB/min.
L
23
X
8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 22 min. 858 MB/min.
87 X
17 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 43 min. 431 MB/min.
65 X
35 min. 2 hr. 20 min. 9 hr. 23 min. 216 MB/min.
HDR movie
65 V
1 hr. 26 min. 5 hr. 47 min. 23 hr. 11 min. 87 MB/min.
w 87 X
40 min. 2 hr. 42 min. 10 hr. 49 min. 187 MB/min.
• When [
k
Digital IS] is disabled.
z
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie recording
to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (
=
280).
z
Total Possible Time for Movie Recording
Approx. 80 min. (at a room temperature of 23°C/73°F)
• With a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17.
• With [Movie rec. size] under [
z
: Movie rec quality] set to
L6X
(NTSC)
or
L5X
(PAL), and with [
z
: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable].
581
Performance Data
ISO Speed in Movie Recording
In [
k
] Mode
z
The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100–12800.
z
Under [
z
:
k
ISO speed settings], setting [Max for Auto] to [H(25600)]
(
=
277) expands the maximum limit of the automatic ISO speed setting
range to H (equivalent to ISO 25600).
In [
M
] Mode
z
With ISO speed set to [AUTO], the speed is automatically set in a range
of ISO 100–12800.
z
When ISO Auto is set, under [
z
:
k
ISO speed settings], setting [Max
for Auto] to [H(25600)] (
=
277) expands the maximum limit of the
automatic ISO speed setting range to H (equivalent to ISO 25600).
z
ISO speed can be set manually in a range of ISO 100–12800. Note
that under [
z
:
k
ISO speed settings], setting [ISO speed range]
to [H(25600)] (
=
277) expands the maximum limit in the manual ISO
speed setting range to H (equivalent to ISO 25600).
582
Performance Data
Image Playback
z
Resize Options by Original Image Quality
Original Image
Quality
Available Resize Settings
4
a b
3
*
k k k
4
k k
a
k
z
Size for Resized Images
(Approx. pixels)
Image
Quality
3:2 4:3
4
4800×3200 (15.4 megapixels) 4256×3200* (13.6 megapixels)
a
3472×2320* (8.1 megapixels) 3072×2320* (7.1 megapixels)
b
2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels) 2112×1600* (3.4 megapixels)
Image
Quality
16:9 1:1
4
4800×2688* (12.9 megapixels) 3200×3200 (10.2 megapixels)
a
3472×1952* (6.8 megapixels) 2320×2320 (5.4 megapixels)
b
2400×1344* (3.2 megapixels) 1600×1600 (2.6 megapixels)
z
The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
dier from the aspect ratio indicated.
z
The image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.
583
Information Display
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Each time you press the <
B
> button, the information display will change.
z
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(1) Movie recording time available
(2) Maximum burst
(3) Possible shots/Sec. until self-
timer shoots
(4) Focus bracketing/HDR/Multi
Shot Noise Reduction/Bulb timer/
Interval timer/RAW burst shooting
(5) Shooting mode/Scene icon
(6) AF method
(7) AF operation
(8) Metering mode
(9) Image quality
(10) Movie recording size
(11) Still image aspect ratio
(12) AF point (1-point AF)
(13) Battery level
(14) No. of shots left for focus
bracketing/interval timer
(15) Temperature warning
(16) Electronic level
(17) Histogram
(18) Quick Control
(19) Anti-icker shooting
(20) White balance/White balance
correction
(21) Picture Style
(22) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(23) Creative lters
(24) Create folder
(25) Magnify button
(26) Exposure simulation
(27) GPS acquisition status
584
Information Display
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(28)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(41)
(40)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(28)
1
indicator
(29) Flash ready/FE Lock/High-speed
sync
(30) Electronic
(31) Drive mode
(32) Touch Shutter
(33) AE lock
(34) Shutter speed
(35) Aperture value
(36) Flash exposure compensation
(37) Exposure level indicator
(38) Wi-Fi function
(39) Wi-Fi signal strength
(40) Bluetooth function
(41) ISO speed
(42) Highlight tone priority
(43) Exposure compensation
(44) AEB/FEB
z
You can set what is displayed for when you press the <
B
> button (
=
512).
z
The electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to [
u
+Tracking]
or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
z
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
585
Information Display
Movie Recording Screen
Each time you press the <
B
> button, the information display will change.
z
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(12)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(21)
(20)
(1) Electronic level
(2) Battery level
(3) Movie recording time available/
Elapsed recording time
(4) Movie recording mode/Time-lapse
movie/Scene icon
(5) AF method
(6) Movie recording size
(7) Movie digital IS
(8) Sound-recording level (manual)
(9) Movie Servo AF
(10) Temperature warning
(11) AF point (1-point AF)
(12) Movie recording prohibited
(13) Histogram (for manual exposure)
(14) Quick Control button
(15) White balance/White balance
correction
(16) Picture Style
(17) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(18) Creative lters
(19) Video snapshot
(20) GPS acquisition status
(21) Magnify button
586
Information Display
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(27)
(28)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(22) Sound-recording level indicator
(manual)
(23) AE lock
(24) Shutter speed
(25) Aperture value
(26) Exposure level indicator
(27) Movie recording in progress
(28) AF/MF selection
(29) Wi-Fi signal strength
(30) Bluetooth function
(31) ISO speed
(32) Highlight tone priority
(33) Wi-Fi function
(34) Exposure compensation
z
You can set what is displayed for when you press the <
B
> button (
=
512).
z
The electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to [
u
+Tracking]
or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
z
The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during movie
recording. (The display will disappear when you start recording a movie.)
z
When movie recording starts, the movie recording remaining time will change
to the elapsed time.
z
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
587
Information Display
Scene Icons
In the <
A
> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and sets
everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is
indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Subject
Background
Portrait Non-Portrait
Background
Color
In
Motion*
1
Nature/
Outdoor
Scene
In
Motion*
1
Close*
2
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset *
3
*
3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blueDark
With Tripod*
1
*
4
*
5
*
3
*
4
*
5
*
3
*1: Not displayed during movie recording.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a
tripod.
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM • EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
z
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match
the actual scene.
588
Information Display
Playback Screen
z
Basic information display for still photos
(1) (8)
(14)
(13)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(15)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(2)
(1) Wi-Fi function
(2) Wi-Fi signal strength
(3) Battery level
(4) Playback No./Total images/
Number of found images
(5) Shutter speed
(6) Aperture value
(7) Exposure compensation amount
(8) Bluetooth function
(9) Already sent to a computer/
smartphone
(10) Rating
(11) Image protection
(12) Folder number-File number
(13) Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
(14) Highlight tone priority
(15) ISO speed
z
If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may
not be displayed.
z
It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other
cameras.
589
Information Display
z
Detailed information display for still photos
(1)
(8)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(14)
(13)
(15)
(16)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(2)
(1) Aperture value
(2) Shutter speed
(3) Shooting mode
(4) White balance
(5) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(6) White balance correction
(7) Picture Style/Settings
(8) Exposure compensation amount
(9) Shooting date and time
(10) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(11) ISO speed
(12) Highlight tone priority
(13) Flash exposure compensation/
Bounce/HDR shooting/Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
(14) Metering mode
(15) File size
(16) Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image le size will be
displayed.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the aspect
ratio set (
=
125) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* During ash photography without ash exposure compensation, [
0
] will be displayed.
* [
] will be displayed for images shot with bounce ash photography.
* An icon for the eect (
=
177) and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be
displayed for images shot with HDR shooting.
* [
M
] will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* [
u
] will be displayed for images created from RAW image processing, extracted
from RAW burst images, resized, cropped, or saved using Creative Assist.
* [
N
] will be displayed for images cropped and then saved.
590
Information Display
z
Detailed information display for movies
(1)
(2)
(7)
(8)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Movie playback
(2) Movie recording mode/Time-lapse
movie/Video snapshot
(3) Image size
(4) Frame rate
(5) Compression method
(6) Movie digital IS
(7) Recording time
(8) Movie recording format
* [
G
] will be displayed for still photos taken as test shots for time-lapse movies.
z
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and [Threshold]
of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
591
Trademarks
z
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
z
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
z
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
z
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
z
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
z
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are trademarks
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
z
WPS used on camera settings screens and in this manual stands for Wi-Fi
Protected Setup.
z
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
z
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
592
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and
may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4
compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial
purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide
MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use
for MPEG-4 standard.”
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES
IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO’’) AND/
OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
* Notice displayed in English as required.
Third party software
This product includes third party software.
● AES-128 Library
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is allowed
without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built using this
software without specic written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided ‘as is’ with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its
properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or tness for purpose.
593
● CMSIS Core header les
Copyright (C) 2009-2015 ARM Limited.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modication, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of ARM nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specic prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
594
● KSDK Peripheral Drivers, Flash / NVM, KSDK H/W Abstraction Layer
(HAL)
(c) Copyright 2010-2015 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modication, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the <organization> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specic prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
<COPYRIGHT HOLDER> BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
595
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine
accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as malfunction, re, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not be
covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs
on a chargeable basis.
z
Battery Pack LP-E17 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents
for which Canon cannot be held liable.
596
Numbers
1-point AF : 198, 203
[4K] 3840×2160 (Movie) : 241
4K frame capture : 315
A
Access lamp : 43
Accessories : 3
Adobe RGB : 162
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing) : 141
AE lock : 217, 233, 531
AF
AF-assist beam : 197, 215
AF method : 198
AF operation : 195
AF point selection : 203
AF speed : 274
Area AF frame : 84, 206
Beep (Beeper) : 508
Continuous AF : 211
Eye detection AF : 209
Lens electronic MF : 214
Limit AF methods : 532
Manual focus : 218
Orientation linked AF point : 532
Recomposing : 74
Touch & drag AF : 212
AF point display : 370
AF start button : 59
Album (video snapshot) : 261, 351
ALL-I : 250
Ambience priority (AWB) : 155, 157
Anti-icker shooting : 193
Aperture-priority AE : 108
Area AF frame : 84, 206
Art bold eect : 340
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 70
Aspect ratio → Still image aspect ratio
Attenuator : 249
Autofocus → AF
Auto level : 270
Auto Lighting Optimizer : 149
Auto power o : 495
Auto reset : 488
Auto rotate : 489
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 108
B
Background music : 311, 312, 353
Basic information display : 588
Basic Zone : 36
Battery → Power
Beep (Beeper) : 508
Bluetooth function : 379, 446, 453
Address : 453
Connecting : 381
Bracketing
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing) : 141
FEB (Flash Exposure
Bracketing) : 298
Focus bracketing : 180
White balance bracketing : 161
Built-in ash : 284
Bulb exposure : 190
Bulb timer : 191
BUSY : 124
C
<C1>/<C2> (Custom shooting) : 519
Camera
Camera vibration blur : 136, 191
Clearing settings : 520
Holding the camera : 57
Camera shake : 58, 73
Card requirements : 244, 579
Cards : 11, 33, 42
Formatting : 45, 490
Low-level formatting : 490
Index
597
Index
Troubleshooting : 45, 559
Write protection : 42
Center-weighted average metering : 151
Certication Logo : 523
Charger : 38, 40
Charging : 40, 554
Chromatic aberration
correction : 131, 346
Clearing settings : 520
Custom shooting mode : 519
Shooting information display : 514
Clipped highlights : 369
Close-up : 87
Color space : 162, 345
Color temperature : 159
Color tone : 88, 167
Combination IS : 269
Compact Power Adapter : 555
Continuous (le numbering) : 487
Continuous shooting : 133
Contrast : 149, 167
Copyright information : 521
Creative Assist : 76, 347
Creative lters : 96, 338
Creative Zone : 37
Cropping (images) : 354
Custom Functions : 525
Customize buttons : 536
Custom shooting mode : 519
Custom white balance : 158
D
Date/time : 497
Daylight saving time : 498
DC coupler : 555
Default settings
Custom Functions : 542
Customizing operations : 542
Flash function settings : 299
My Menu : 547
Wireless communication : 460
Depth-of-eld preview : 109
Diraction correction : 131, 346
Digest movies : 222, 317
Digital Lens Optimizer : 130, 345
Digital terminal : 552
Display o : 495
Display settings : 516
Distortion correction : 129, 345
Double-tap : 306
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) : 331
Dragging : 66
Drive mode : 133
Dust Delete Data : 174
E
Eco mode : 494
Electronic level : 583, 584
Erasing (images) : 327
Err (error codes) : 575
Error messages : 575
Evaluative metering : 151
exFAT : 246, 491
Expanded ISO speed :
143, 145, 277, 581
Exposure compensation : 140
Exposure compensation in M mode
with ISO Auto : 111
Exposure level increments : 528
Exposure level indicator : 584, 586
Exposure simulation : 154
External microphone : 249
External Speedlite → Flash (Speedlite)
Eye detection AF : 209
F
Face+Tracking : 198, 201
FAT32 : 246, 491
598
Index
Feature guide : 493
FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) : 298
FE lock : 287
[FHD] 1920×1080 (Movie) : 241
File extension : 122, 243
File size : 246, 577, 580
Filter eect (Monochrome) : 168
Fine (Image quality) : 122
Firmware : 523
First-curtain synchronization : 297
Fish-eye eect : 98, 339
Flash
Flash exposure
compensation : 286, 293
Flash exposure compensation : 286, 293
Flash mode : 292, 295
Flash (Speedlite)
Built-in ash : 284
Custom Functions : 298
Eective range : 284
External ash units : 300
FEB (Flash Exposure
Bracketing) : 298
FE lock : 287
Flash control (function settings) : 289
Flash exposure compensation : 293
Manual ash : 292, 295
Red-eye reduction : 290
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) : 293, 297
Slow synchro : 291
Sync Speed : 300
Wireless : 296
Flexible-priority AE : 112
Focus bracketing : 180
Focusing → AF
Focus lock : 74
Focus mode switch :
7, 35, 52, 218, 221, 501
Folder creation/selection : 484
Food : 88
Formatting : 45, 490
Formatting (card initialization) : 45, 490
Frame Grab : 315
Frame rate : 243, 502
Fv (Flexible-priority AE) : 112
G
GPS : 455
Grainy B/W : 98, 339
Grid display : 371, 513
H
Handheld night scene : 90
[HD] 1280×720 (Movie) : 241
HDMI : 278, 321, 509
HDMI HDR : 510
HDMI output : 278
HDR art bold : 99
HDR art embossed : 99
HDR art standard : 99
HDR Backlight Control : 91
HDR movie recording : 239
HDR shooting : 176
Help : 518
Text size : 518
High dynamic range → HDR shooting
High ISO speed noise reduction : 172
Highlight alert : 369
Highlight tone priority : 150
High-speed continuous shooting : 133
Histogram : 367, 514
Hot shoe : 35, 300
Household power : 555
I
ICC prole : 162
Icons : 9
599
Index
Image browsing (jump display) : 365
Image quality : 122, 577
Image review time : 127
Images
AF point display : 370
Auto reset : 488
Auto rotation : 489
Continuous (le numbering) : 487
Erasing : 327
File numbering : 486
Highlight alert : 369
Histogram : 367
Importing (to computer) : 552
Index display : 308
Jump display (image browsing) : 365
Magnifying images : 307
Manual reset : 488
Manual rotation : 326
Playback : 301
Protecting images : 323
Rating : 358
Search conditions : 363
Shooting information : 305, 589
Image search : 363
Image stabilization : 216
Importing images to a computer : 552
Index display : 308
INFO button : 61
Interval timer : 187
IPB : 243
ISO speed : 143, 277
Auto range (Still photos) : 146
ISO Auto range : 146, 576
ISO speed range : 145, 277
Minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto
(Still photos) : 147
J
JPEG : 577
Jump display : 365
L
Landscape : 83
Language : 500
Large (image quality) : 122
Lens : 49, 51
Chromatic aberration
correction : 131, 346
Diraction correction : 131, 346
Digital Lens Optimizer : 130, 345
Distortion correction : 129, 345
Focus mode switch : 52, 219
Lock release : 50, 53
Optical aberration
correction : 128, 276, 345
Peripheral illumination
correction : 129, 345
Lens electronic MF : 214
Location information : 455
Long (bulb) exposures : 190
Long Exposure Noise Reduction : 171
Low-speed continuous shooting : 133
M
Magnication : 373
Magnifying images : 205, 218, 307
Main dial : 34, 59
Malfunction : 556
Manual exposure : 110, 234
Manual focus : 218
Manual reset : 488
Maximum burst : 124, 577
Medium (image quality) : 122
Memory cards → Cards
Menu : 62
Custom Functions : 526
Dimmed menu items : 65
Function settings : 482
Movie recording : 228
My Menu : 543
600
Index
Playback : 302
Setting procedure : 63
Still photo shooting : 117
Wireless communication
functions : 376
Metering mode : 151
Metering timer : 153
MF (Manual focusing) : 218
M-Fn button : 34, 60
MF peaking : 220
Microphone : 233, 249
Miniature eect : 99, 101, 340
Miniature eect movie : 266
M (Manual exposure) : 110
Mode dial : 36
Monochrome : 164, 168
Movies : 227
AE lock : 233
Attenuator : 249
Autoexposure recording : 232
Auto level for movies : 270
Auto slow shutter : 279
Cards that can record movies : 579
Compression method : 243
Digest movies : 222, 317
Editing : 313, 317
Editing out rst and last scenes : 313
External microphone : 249
File size : 246, 580
Frame Grab : 315
Frame rate : 243
Grid display : 513
HDMI output : 278, 509
HDR movie recording : 239
Information display : 585
Manual exposure recording : 234
Microphone : 233, 249
Movie digital IS : 268
Movie recording size : 241
Movie Servo AF : 271, 273, 274
Movie Servo AF speed : 274
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity : 273
Playback : 309
Recording time : 247, 580
Sound recording/Sound-recording
level : 248
Time-lapse movie : 250
Video snapshot : 261
Wind lter : 248
MP4 : 243
Multi function : 34, 60
Multi Shot Noise Reduction : 172
My Menu : 544
N
Night Portrait : 89
Noise reduction
High ISO speed : 172
Long (bulb) exposures : 171
Non-Canon ash units : 300
Normal (Image quality) : 122
NTSC : 243, 502
Number of pixels : 122, 577
O
One-Shot AF : 196
Orientation linked AF point : 532
P
PAL : 243, 502
Panning : 85
Partial metering : 151
Part names : 34
Peripheral illumination
correction : 129, 345
Photobook set-up : 335
Picture Style : 163, 166, 169
601
Index
Playback : 301
Portrait : 81
Possible recording time (movie) : 580
Possible shots : 576
Power : 47
Auto power o : 495
Battery level : 48
Charging : 40, 554
Household power : 555
Possible shots : 576
Power saving : 495
P (Program AE) : 104
Pressing completely : 58, 511
Pressing halfway : 58, 511
Printing
Photobook set-up : 335
Print order : 331
Program AE : 104
Program shift : 105
Protecting images : 323
Q
[Q] (Quick Control) : 67
Quick Control : 67
Quick control dial : 34, 59
R
Rating : 358
RAW : 123
RAW burst mode : 137
RAW image processing : 341
RAW+JPEG : 122, 577
Red-eye correction : 350
Red-eye reduction : 290
Reduced display : 308
Remote controller : 223
Remote control terminal : 223
Remote switch : 223
Resizing : 356
Rotating (images) : 326, 489
S
Safety instructions : 28
Safety shift : 531
Saturation : 167
Scene icons : 75, 587
Scene Intelligent Auto : 70
<SCN> (Special scene mode) : 36, 78
Screen : 32, 46
Angle adjustment : 46
Brightness : 496
SD/SDHC/SDXC cards → Cards
Second-curtain
synchronization : 293, 297
Self Portrait : 80
Self-timer : 135
Sensitivity → ISO speed
Sensor cleaning : 503
Sepia (Monochrome) : 168
Servo AF
Initial AF Point : 533
Movie Servo AF : 271, 273, 274
SERVO : 196
SERVO (Servo AF) : 196
Sharpness : 167
Shooting information display : 512, 583
Shooting mode
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 70
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 108
[C1]/[C2] (Custom shooting) : 519
Creative lters : 96
Fish-eye eect : 98
Grainy B/W : 98
HDR art bold : 99
HDR art embossed : 99
HDR art standard : 99
Miniature eect : 99
Soft focus : 98
602
Index
Toy camera eect : 98
Water painting eect : 98
Fv (Flexible-priority AE) : 112
M (Manual exposure) : 110
P (Program AE) : 104
Special scene mode (SCN) : 78
Close-up : 87
Food : 88
Handheld night scene : 90
HDR Backlight Control : 91
Landscape : 83
Night Portrait : 89
Panning : 85
Portrait : 81
Self Portrait : 80
Smooth skin : 82
Sports : 84
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 106
Shooting mode guide : 492
Shutter button : 58, 511
Shutter button functions : 511
Shutter-priority AE : 106
Shutter release method : 186
Shutter synchronization : 293, 297
Single-image display : 304
Single shooting : 133
Slide show : 361
Small (image quality) : 122
Smooth skin : 82
Soft focus : 98, 339
Software : 550
Instruction Manual : 551
Sound recording/Sound-recording
level : 248
Special scene mode (SCN) : 78
Sports : 84
Spot AF : 198, 203
Spot metering : 151
sRGB : 162
Still image aspect ratio : 125, 578
Still photo extraction : 319
Strap : 38
T
Temperature warning : 224, 280
Tilt correction : 355
Time-lapse movie : 250
Time zone : 497
Tone priority : 150
Toning eect (Monochrome) : 168
Touch beeping : 508
Touch operation : 66, 306, 507
Touch Shutter : 184
Toy camera eect : 98, 340
Tracking sensitivity : 273
Troubleshooting : 556
TV display : 321
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 106
U
UHS-II/UHS-I : 11
USB (digital) terminal : 552
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) : 457
V
Video snapshot : 261
Video system : 502
Viewnder
Display format : 515
Volume (movie playback) : 311, 312
W
Water painting eect : 98, 340
WB (White balance) : 155
White balance (WB) : 155
Ambience priority : 155, 157
Auto : 157
603
Index
Bracketing : 161
Color temperature setting : 159
Correction : 160
Custom : 158
White priority : 155
White priority (AWB) : 155, 157
Wi-Fi function : 375
Android : 380
Camera access point mode : 444
Camera Connect : 380, 386
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY : 426
Clearing wireless communication
settings : 460
Connection history : 449, 452
Edit device information : 404, 458
EOS Utility : 408
Erase connection information : 459
Image Transfer Utility 2 : 413
iOS : 380
IP address : 444
MAC address : 461
Network : 391, 409, 417
Network settings : 477
Nickname : 459
Notes : 474
Pairing : 382
Password : 452
PictBridge : 416
Printer : 416
Printing : 418
Print order : 421
Reconnecting : 449
Remote operation : 386
Resize image : 394, 399, 434
Sending all images on
the card : 400, 437
Sending images that match search
conditions : 401, 438
Send selected : 396, 433
SSID : 391, 409, 417
Switch network : 442
Viewable images : 404
View info screen : 461
Viewing images : 386
Virtual keyboard : 462
Wi-Fi settings : 452
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) : 441
Wind lter : 248
Wireless communication : 375
Z
Zone AF : 199, 203
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of November 2019.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SX7WA211 © CANON INC. 2019
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
… 579 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Canon-EOS-M6-Mark-II

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Canon EOS M6 Mark II bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Canon EOS M6 Mark II in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 28,17 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Canon EOS M6 Mark II

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Aanvulling / aanpassing - Nederlands - 16 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 14 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 604 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Aanvulling / aanpassing - Deutsch - 16 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 604 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch - 14 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Aanvulling / aanpassing - English - 16 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Snelstart handleiding - English - 14 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Aanvulling / aanpassing - Français - 16 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Snelstart handleiding - Français - 14 pagina's

Canon EOS M6 Mark II Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 604 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info